Peugeot 5008 5008 2013 Owner's Manual

You can find your user guide on the PEUGEOT website, under the heading "Personal space".

This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.

Referring to the user guide on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmarks, associated with this pictogram:

Please note the following point:

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle’s electronic system. Please note this specific warning.

It is advisable to contact a PEUGEOT dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.

If the heading "Personal space" is not available on the public website for your country, you can find your user guide at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com

Select:

the link in "Private customer access",

the language,

the model,

the edition date appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.

You will find your user guide, presented in the same way as the paper version.

Thank you for choosing a 5008, a symbol of con fi dence, passion and inspiration.

This handbook has been designed to enable you to make the most of your

5008.

On the fi rst few pages, you will fi nd a detailed summary, followed by a quick reference guide intended to make it easier for you to become familiar with your vehicle.

All of the details speci fi c to your 5008, comfort, safety, driving, are then presented in this handbook, to increase your appreciation of the vehicle and to help you make the most of it.

At the end of the handbook, illustrations of the interior and exterior of the vehicle will assist you in locating equipment or a function by means of the page indexed.

Each model may only be fi tted with some of the equipment mentioned in this handbook, depending on the trim level, model, version and the speci fi cation for the country in which it is sold.

WELCOME

Key

Warning:

this symbol marks warnings which it is essential to observe for your own safety, for the safety of others or to avoid any risk of damaging your vehicle.

Information:

this symbol draws your attention to additional information for better use of your vehicle.

Protection of the environment:

this symbol accompanies advice relating to protection of the environment.

Page reference:

this symbol invites you to refer to the pages which provide details of the function.

CONTENTS

FAMILIARISATION 4-24

ECO-DRIVING 25-26

INSTRUMENTS and

CONTROLS 27-41

Instrument panels........................... 27

Indicator and warning lamps .......... 29

Indicators ........................................ 37

Adjustment buttons......................... 41

MULTIFUNCTION

SCREENS 42-55

t 42

Screen A with audio equipment...... 44

Screen C (Peugeot Connect Sound

(RD5))........................................... 46

16/9 retractable colour screen

(Peugeot Connect Navigation

(RT6) or Peugeot Connect Media

Navigation (NG4 3D))................... 49

52

COMFORT 56-73

Heating and Ventilation .................. 56

Manual air conditioning .................. 58

Rear screen demist - defrost.......... 59

Dual-zone digital air conditioning .... 60

Front seats ..................................... 63

Rear seats, 2nd row ....................... 67

Access to the 3rd row..................... 69

Rear seats, 3rd row........................ 70

Seat modularity .............................. 71

Mirrors ............................................ 72

Steering wheel adjustment ............. 73

FITTINGS 101-114

Interior fittings ............................... 101

Centre console ............................. 103

Rear multimedia ........................... 106

Panoramic sunroof .......................

107

Boot fittings 5 seat version ........... 108

Boot fittings 7 seat version ........... 109

ACCESS 74-88

Remote control key ........................ 74

Alarm .............................................. 79

Electric windows............................. 81

Doors .............................................. 83

Boot ................................................ 85

Fuel tank......................................... 87

Misfuel prevention (Diesel)............. 88

VISIBILITY 89-100

Lighting controls ............................. 89

LED lamps...................................... 91

Headlamp adjustment .................... 93

Directional lighting .......................... 94

Wiper controls ................................ 95

Automatic rain sensitive wipers...... 97

Courtesy lamps .............................. 98

Interior mood lighting ...................... 99

CHILD SAFETY 115-128

Child seats.....................................115

ISOFIX child seats........................ 124

Child lock...................................... 128

SAFETY 129-140

Direction indicators....................... 129

Hazard warning lamps.................. 129

Horn.............................................. 129

Tyre under-inflation detection ....... 130

ESC system.................................. 131

Front seat belts............................. 133

Airbags ......................................... 137

DRIVING 141-171

Electric parking brake................... 141

Hill start assist .............................. 146

Head-up display ........................... 149

Distance alert ............................... 151 r 153

Cruise control ............................... 155

Manual gearbox ............................ 157

Gear shift indicator .......................

6-speed electronic gear control

157 gearbox ...................................... 158

Automatic gearbox ....................... 162

Stop & Start .................................. 165

Parking sensors ............................ 168

Parking space sensors ................. 170

PRACTICAL

INFORMATION 181-216

Temporary puncture repair kit ...... 181

Changing a wheel......................... 190

Changing a bulb ........................... 196

Changing a fuse ........................... 201

12 V battery .................................. 208

Energy economy mode .................211

Changing a wiper blade ................211

Towing the vehicle ........................ 212

213 r

Fitting roof bars ............................ 214

Very cold climate screen .............. 215

Accessories .................................. 216

CONTENTS

AUDIO EQUIPMENT and TELEMATICS 227-348

Emergency or assistance ............. 227

Peugeot Connect Media Navigation

(NG4 3D).................................... 231

Peugeot Connect Navigation

(RT6) .......................................... 275

Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) .... 329

INDEX 349-353

CHECKS 172-180

Bonnet .......................................... 173

Running out of fuel (Diesel).......... 174

Petrol engines .............................. 175

Diesel engines.............................. 176

Checking levels ............................ 177

Checks.......................................... 179

TECHNICAL DATA 217-226

Petrol engines .............................. 217

Petrol weights............................... 218

Diesel engines.............................. 219

Diesel weights .............................. 220

Dimensions ................................... 224

Identification markings.................. 225

VISUAL SEARCH 354-360

EXTERIOR

Stop & Start

This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during stops in the traf fi c (red lights, traf fi c jams, etc...). The engine restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions and provides the comfort of complete silence when stationary .

165

4

Welcome lighting

This additional exterior and interior lighting, controlled remotely, makes your approach to the vehicle easier when the light is poor.

91

Panoramic sunroof

This roof provides incomparable visibility and light in the passenger compartment.

107

Directional lighting

This lighting automatically provides additional visibility when cornering.

94

EXTERIOR

Parking space sensor

This system measures the size of the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles.

170

When washing your vehicle in a car wash:

- remove the aerial,

- fold back the mirrors.

Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit is a complete system, consisting of a compressor and an integrated sealant product, for the temporary repair of a tyre.

181

Visual and audible front and/or rear parking sensors

This system warns you if an obstacle is detected behind or in front of the vehicle in reverse or forward gear.

168

5

ACCESS

Remote control key Welcome lighting Fuel tank

6

A.

Unfolding / Folding the key.

Normal locking

(press once; fi xed lighting of the direction indicators).

or

Deadlocking the vehicle

(press twice in succession; fi xed lighting of the direction indicators).

When the light is poor, detected by a sensor, the remote switching on of the dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps makes your approach to the vehicle easier.

This function can be programmed via the con fi guration menu.

1.

Opening the fuel fi ller fl ap.

2.

Opening and hooking the fuel fi ller cap.

The type of fuel to be used is indicated on the inner face of the fuel fi ller fl ap.

Capacity of the tank: approximately

60 litres.

91

87

Complete or selective unlocking of the vehicle

(rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators).

On Diesel vehicles, the fuel fi ller neck incorporates a misfuel prevention device which prevents fi lling with petrol.

74

ACCESS

1.

Unlocking the vehicle.

2.

Opening the boot.

85

1.

Opening the blind. 2.

Closing the blind.

107

7

INTERIOR

Head-up display

This system projects certain information into the fi eld of vision of the driver: speed, cruise control/speed limiter and Distance alert.

149

Electric parking brake automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration.

Manual application/release is possible.

141

8

Audio and communication systems

This equipment bene fi ts from the latest technology: MP3 compatible Peugeot

Connect Sound (RD5), Peugeot Connect

USB, Bluetooth, Peugeot Connect Media

Navigation (NG4 3D) or Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RT6) with 16/9 retractable colour screen, JBL audio system, auxiliary sockets.

231 Peugeot Connect USB Peugeot Connect Media

Navigation (NG4 3D)

Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RT6)

Peugeot Connect

Sound (RD5)

275

329

Bluetooth

PEUGEOT

Assistance

254,

310,

336

259,

297,

339

228

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

This system allows different levels of comfort to be set for the driver and front passenger. It then controls these levels automatically according to the ambient conditions.

60

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

1.

Audio and telematic system steering mounted control stalk.

2.

Steering lock and ignition.

3.

Wipers / screenwash / trip computer control stalk.

4.

Instrument panel.

5.

Driver's airbag.

Horn.

6.

Gear lever.

7.

Electric parking brake.

8.

12 V accessory socket.

9.

Centre console.

10.

Panoramic sunroof control.

11.

Handbook storage compartment.

12.

Manual headlamp adjustment.

Instrument panel navigator associated with the Peugeot

Connect Media Navigation (RT6).

13.

Alarm switch.

Parking sensors switch.

Dynamic stability control switch

(ESC/ASR).

Stop & Start deactivation switch.

14.

Door mirror controls.

Electric window controls.

15.

Front door window demist/defrost vent.

16.

Windscreen demist/defrost vent.

9

10


1.

Steering wheel adjustment.

2.

Cruise control / speed limiter switches.

3.

Lighting and direction indicator control stalk.

4.

Central adjustable air vents.

5.

Head-up display.

6.

Multifunction screen.

7.

Passenger's airbag deactivation.

8.

Side adjustable air vent.

9.

Glove box - Audio/video sockets.

10.

Bonnet release.

11.

12 V accessory socket.

12.

Heating / air conditioning controls.

13.

Audio and telematic system.

14.

Switches:

- head-up display,

- hazard warning lamps,

- Distance alert,

- central locking.

SITTING COMFORTABLY

Driver's seat

Forwards-backwards Height

Manual adjustment

63

Electric adjustment

64

Seat back angle

11

12


Front seats

Head restraint height and angle

Steering wheel adjustment Centre console

Lumbar

1.

Releasing the adjustment mechanism.

2.

Adjustment of height and reach.

3.

Locking the adjustment mechanism.

This has a large storage area (with recesses for 2 bottles, ...) for the front passengers and, according to version, a multimedia system for the rear passengers.

As a safety precaution, these operations must only be carried out when stationary.

103,

106

73

65


Door mirrors

Rear view mirror Front seat belts

Manual model

Adjustment

A.

Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.

B.

Adjustment of the position of the mirror in the four directions.

1.

Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.

2.

Adjustment of the mirror.

73

1.

Fastening the buckle.

72

Also...

C.

Folding /

Unfolding.

2.

Height adjustment.

Automatic day/night model

1.

Adjustment of the mirror.

73

133

13

SEEING CLEARLY

Lighting Direction indicators Wipers

14

Ring A

Lighting off.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Dipped / main beam headlamps.

89

Ring B

Rear foglamp.

or

Front and rear foglamps.

90

Raise or lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will fl ash for as long as the stalk remains in this position.

Stalk A: windscreen wipers

Switching on "AUTO"

) Press the stalk down and release it.

"Motorway" function

Press the lighting stalk up or down once, without passing the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will fl ash three times.

This function can be used at any speed, but it is particularly useful when changing lane on high-speed roads.

Switching off "AUTO"

) Push the stalk up and return it to position "0" .

97

Ring B: rear wiper

129

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.

96

VENTILATION

Recommended interior settings

I require...

Air distribution Air fl

Heating or Manual Air Conditioning

ow

Air recirculation /

Intake of outside air

Temperature Manual A/C

HOT

COLD

DEMISTING

DEFROSTING

Digital air conditioning: we recommend use of the fully automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO" button.

15

MONITORING

Instrument panels

Switch panels

Lower

16

Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the status of the corresponding function.

A.

Visual and audible parking sensors.

B.

ESC OFF.

168

131

128

A.

With the ignition on, the needle should indicate the level of fuel remaining.

B.

With the engine running, its associated low level warning lamp should go off.

C.

With the ignition on, the oil level indicator should display "OIL OK" for a few seconds.

If the levels are not correct, top up the levels which are low.

29

C.

Child lock.

D.

Parking space sensors.

E.

Deactivation of

Stop & Start.

1.

With the ignition on, the orange and red warning lamps come on.

2.

With the engine running, these warning lamps should go off.

If warning lamps remain on, refer to the page concerned.

F.

Volumetric

Central

27

G.

Head-up display.

H.

Hazard warning lamps.

I.

Distance

170

166

79

149

129

151

J.

Central locking.

84

PASSENGER SAFETY

Passenger's front airbag Seat belts and passenger's front airbag

Child lock

(locking of the rear doors)

1.

Insert the key.

2.

Select the position:

"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat,

"ON" (activation), with front passenger or "forwards facing" child seat.

3.

Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

138

A.

Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened / unfastened warning lamp.

B.

Front left seat belt warning lamp.

C.

Front right seat belt warning lamp.

D.

Rear right seat belt warning lamp.

E.

Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.

F.

Rear left seat belt warning lamp.

G.

Passenger's front airbag deactivated warning lamp.

H.

Passenger's front airbag activated warning lamp.

Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the status of the corresponding function.

128

134

7 seat version (3rd row)

I.


J.


17

ARRANGING YOUR SEATS

Folding the seats in the

2nd row

Putting the seats back in place

7 SEAT VERSION

Access to the 3rd row seats

18

) Raise the seat back and push it rearwards until it locks.

) Pull the strap A upwards fi rmly to release the seat and continue to pull until the seat is fully folded.

Rigid panel

From the boot

) Pull the strap B to release the seat and push the seat back forwards gently.

68

) After folding the seats, slide the catch C .

69

) Close the aircraft style tables on the

2 nd row seats if they are open.

) Hold the control up, the seat is released and the seat base rises to the seat back.

) Push the seat back forwards, holding the control D forwards.

69

ARRANGING YOUR SEATS (7 SEAT VERSION)

Changing from 5 to 7 seats

) Place the rigid panels of the 2 nd row seats upright and lock them then fold the concertina boards rearwards.

) Remove the load space cover and store it in its housing.

) Pull the strap and guide the seat until the assembly locks.

) Fold the concertina boards forwards.

70,

110

) Lower the head restraints and place the concertina board in the vertical position behind the seat.

) While pulling the strap , push the seat back forwards gently.

) Remove the load space screen from its storage compartment and position it behind the 2 nd row seats.

70,

110

19

20

DRIVING SAFELY

Stop & Start

Going into engine STOP mode

The warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine automatically goes into ith a 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox: at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N .

In some circumstances, STOP mode may not be available; the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for few seconds, then goes off.

Going into engine START mode

The " ECO " warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts with a 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox :

- gear lever in position A or M , release the brake pedal,

- or with the gear lever in position and the brake pedal released, move the gear lever to position A or M ,

- or engage reverse gear.

In some circumstances START mode may be invoked automatically; the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

Deactivation / Reactivation

You can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the comes on.

"ECO OFF" button; the warning lamp in the button

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

Before refuelling or doing anything under the bonnet, you must switch off the ignition using the key.

165

DRIVING SAFELY

Electric parking brake

Manual application / release

The parking brake can be applied manually by pulling the control lever A .

When the ignition is on, the parking brake can be manually by pressing the brake pedal and pulling then releasing the control lever A .

Automatic application / release

Press the accelerator, press and and release the clutch (manual gearbox), the parking brake is released automatically and progressively on acceleration.

With the vehicle stationary, when the engine is switched off , the parking brake is applied automatically. lamp

Before getting out of the vehicle, check that the braking warning lamp

( red!

) and the warning

, located in the control lever are on fi xed (not fl ashing).

A

If this warning lamp is on in the instrument panel, the automatic application/release is deactivated , in this case use the manual application/release.

If you are towing a trailer or a caravan or if the gradient is likely to change (transport by ship, lorry, towing, ...), apply the parking brake manually to maximum force (long pull on control lever A ) to immobilise the vehicle.

When the door is opened with the engine running an audible signal is heard, apply the parking brake manually.

Do not leave a child alone in the vehicle with the ignition on, they could release the parking brake.

141

21

DRIVING SAFELY

Hill start assist Head-up display Distance alert

22

Your vehicle is equipped with a system which keeps it immobile for a short time

(approximately 2 seconds) to assist you when starting on a hill, the time required for you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This system only operates:

- when the vehicle has been completely stopped with your foot on the brake pedal,

- on certain gradients,

- when the driver's door is closed.

1.

Head-up display on / off.

2.

Brightness adjustment.

3.

Display height adjustment.

149

1.

Distance alert on /off.

2.

Alert value increase / decrease.

151

Do not get out of the vehicle during the hill start assist temporary holding phase.

146

The adjustments must be made with the engine running and the vehicle stationary.

DRIVING SAFELY

Speed limiter "LIMIT" Cruise control "CRUISE" Display in the instrument panel

1.

Limiter mode Selection / Off.

2.

Decrease the programmed value.

3.

Increase the programmed value.

4.

Speed limiter On / Off.

1.

Cruise control mode Selection / Off.

2.

Programme a speed / Decrease the programmed value.

3.

Programme a speed / Increase the programmed value.

4.

Cruise control Off / Resume.

The values must be set with the engine running.

153

In order to be programmed or activated, the vehicle speed must be higher than 25 mph (40 km/h), with at least fourth gear engaged on the manual gearbox (second gear for the

6-speed electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox).

The cruise control or speed limiter mode appears in the instrument panel when it is selected.

Cruise control

Speed limiter

155

23

24

DRIVING SAFELY

6-speed electronic gear control gearbox

This 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

1.

Gear lever.

2.

Button .

"Porsche Tiptronic System" automatic gearbox

3.

4.

Steering mounted

Steering mounted

"-"

"+"

paddle.

paddle.

This six-speed gearbox offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

1.

Gear lever.

2.

Button .

3.

7 " (snow) .

Moving off

) Select position and press the brake pedal fi rmly while starting the engine.

) Engage fi rst gear (position or reverse (position gear lever 1 .

or )

R ) using the

) Take your foot off the brake pedal then accelerate.

Moving off

) Select position P or N and press the brake pedal fi rmly while starting the engine.

) Select position R , D or M .

) Take your foot off the brake pedal, then accelerate.

162

158

ECO-DRIVING

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO

2

emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox

With a manual gearbox, move off gently, change up without waiting and drive by changing up quite soon. If your vehicle has the system, the gear shift indicator invites you to change up; it is displayed in the instrument panel, follow its instructions.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A" , according to the type of gearbox, without pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.

Control the use of your electrical equipment

Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.

Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.

Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...).

Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic digital regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.

Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices ( fi lm, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.

Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

Drive smoothly

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO

2

emissions and also helps reduce the background traffi c noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above

25 mph (40 km/h) when the traf fi c is fl owing well.

26

Limit the causes of excess consumption

Observe the recommendations on maintenance

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.

Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side.

Carry out this check in particular:

- before a long journey,

- at each change of season,

- after a long period out of use.

Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

When refuelling, do not continue after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any over fl ow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the fi rst 1 800 miles

(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and re fi t your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly

(engine oil, oil fi lter, air fi lter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.

INSTRUMENT PANELS Dials

1.

Rev counter.

Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).

2.

Coolant temperature.

Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant (° Celsius).

3.

Fuel level.

Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

4.

Speedometer.

Indicates the current speed of the moving vehicle (mph or km/h).

5.

Screen.

6.

Display zero reset or service indicator re-display button.

Resets the selected function to zero

(trip distance recorder or service indicator) or displays the service indicator again.

7.

Instrument panel lighting dimmer.

Adjusts the brightness of the lighting of the instruments and controls, if the vehicle lighting is on.

Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.

For more information, refer to the section corresponding to the button or function and its associated display.

27

Screen(s) C.

Service indicator.

(miles or km) or,

Engine oil level indicator.

or

distance

(miles or km)

D.

6-speed electronic gear control or automatic gearbox.

E.

Warning messages and function status messages, trip computer,

GPS navigation information.

Instrument panel navigator

Controls

There are four buttons to control the screen in the instrument panel:

1.

Access the main menu, con fi rm the selection.

2.

Move up through the menu.

3.

Move down through the menu.

4.

Return to the previous display, exit from the menu.

A.

Speed limiter

or

Cruise

(mph or km/h)

B.

Trip distance recorder.

(miles or km)

This group of buttons permits:

- When stationary , con fi guration of the vehicle's equipment and the screen settings (languages, units...),

- While driving , scrolling of the active functions (trip computer, navigation...).

The main menu and its associated functions can only be accessed when stationary, via buttons 1 to 4 .

A message appears in the screen, above a certain speed threshold, indicating that the main menu cannot be displayed.

The trip computer displays can only be accessed while driving, via buttons 3 (refer to the "Trip computer" section).

Main menu

) Press button for access to the main menu and select one of the following functions:

- "Vehicle parameters",

- "Choice of language",

- "Choice of units".

) Press button 3 to move in the screen.

) Press button 1 again to con fi rm the selection.

* According to country.

Vehicle parameters

INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS

Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation (operation or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).

This menu allows you to activate or deactivate certain driving and comfort equipment * :

- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the "Visibility" section),

- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access" section),

- guide-me-home and welcome lighting (refer to the "Visibility" section),

- interior mood lighting (refer to the

"Visibility" section),

- daytime running lamps (refer to the


- directional headlamps (refer to the


- automatic or manual parking brake

(refer to the "Driving" section).

Choice of language

This menu allows you to select the display language: Deutsch, English,

Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands,

Portugues, Türkçe * .

Choice of units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

When the ignition is switched on

Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched on.

When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off.

If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned.

Associated warnings

The illumination of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

The warning lamps may come on continuously ( fi xed) or fl ash.

Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two different modes. Only by relating the type of illumination to the operating status of the vehicle can it be ascertained whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has occurred.

29

30

Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this con fi rms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Left-hand direction indicato r

Right-hand direction indicator fl with buzzer. fl

ashing

ashing with buzzer.

The lighting stalk is pushed down.

The lighting stalk is pushed up.

Sidelamps

Dipped beam headlamps headlamps

Main beam fi fi fi

xed.

xed.

xed.

The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.

The lighting stalk is in the

"Dipped beam headlamps" position.

The lighting stalk is pulled towards you.

Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.

Front foglamps fi xed.

Rear foglamps

Diesel engine pre-heating

Electric parking brake fi fi fi

xed.

xed.

xed.

The front foglamps are switched on.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off the front foglamps.

The rear foglamps are switched on.

The ignition switch is at the

2nd position (ignition on).

The electric parking brake is applied.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps.

Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.

The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined by the climatic conditions.

Release the electric parking brake to switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, pull the electric parking brake control lever.

Observe the safety recommendations.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.

Warning lamp

Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake

Foot on the brake pedal is on fi fi

xed.

xed. fl ashing.

The brake pedal must be pressed.

Cause

The "automatic application"

(on switching off the engine) and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty.

Action/Observations

Activate the function (according to country) via the vehicle con fi guration menu or contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop if automatic application / release is not possible.

The parking brake can be released manually using the emergency release procedure.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.

Press the brake pedal to start the engine with the 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox

(lever in position N ) or automatic gearbox

(lever in position P ).

If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.

In the case of an electronic gear control gearbox, if you hold the vehicle on an incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.

Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.

Parking space sensors

Stop & Start fl fi xed.

ashing.

The parking space sensors function is active.

Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.

The system is measuring the space.

Once the measurement has been done, the warning lamp comes on fi xed again. fi xed. fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, traf fi c jams, ...) the

Stop & Start system has put the engine into STOP mode.

STOP mode is temporarily unavailable.

or

START mode is invoked automatically.

The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.

For more information on special cases with

STOP mode and START mode, refer to the

"Stop & Start" section.

31

32

Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this con fi rms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.

This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp

Passenger's airbag system is on fi xed.

Cause Action/Observations

The control, located in the glove box, is set to the OFF position.

The passenger's front airbag is deactivated.

In this case you can install a "rear facing" child seat.

Set the control to the ON position to activate the passenger's front airbag.

In this case, do not fi t a child seat in the rear-facing position.

Dynamic stability control

( DSC/ASR ) fi xed.

The button, located at the bottom right of the dashboard, is pressed. Its indicator lamp is on.

The DSC/ASR is deactivated.

DSC: dynamic stability control.

ASR: anti-slip regulation, or traction control.

Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its indicator lamp goes off.

The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.

If it has been deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from approximately

30 mph (50 km/h).

Warning lamps

When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver.

Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the multifunction screen.

If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.


STOP

Service

PEF: particle fi emissions

lter, Diesel fi xed, alone or associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Illumination of this warning lamp is associated with a serious braking system, power steering, engine lubrication or cooling system malfunction or a punctured tyre.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk that the engine will cut out while driving.

Park, switch off the ignition and contact a

PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

on temporarily. fi xed.

A minor fault has occurred for which there is no speci warning lamp.

A major fault has occurred for which there is no speci warning lamp. fi fi

c

c

Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the screen, such as, for example:

- the closing of the doors, boot or bonnet,

- the engine oil level,

- the screenwash level,

- the remote control battery,

- the tyre pressures,

- saturation of the particle emission fi lter (Diesel).

- ...

For any other faults, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message shown on the screen and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. fi xed, associated temporarily with a message on the risk of blockage of the PEF.

This indicates the start of saturation of the particle emissions fi lter. fi xed.

This indicates the low level in the Diesel additive reservoir.

As soon as traf fi c conditions allow, regenerate the fi lter by driving at a speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h) until the service warning lamp goes off.

Have the level topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop as soon as possible.

34

Warning lamp

Electric parking brake is on fl ashing.


The electric parking brake is not applied automatically.

The application/release is faulty.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park on fl at level ground, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Electric parking brake fault

+

+

Braking

Anti-lock

Braking

System

(ABS) fi xed.

The electric parking brake has a fault.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

The parking brake can be released manually using the emergency release procedure.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section. fi xed, associated with the STOP warning lamp.

The braking system fl uid level has dropped signi fi cantly.


Top up with brake fl uid recommended by

PEUGEOT.

If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop. fi xed, associated with the electric parking brake malfunction warning lamp, if the parking brake is released.

The braking system has a fault. fi xed, associated with the STOP and ABS warning lamps. fi xed.

The electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) system has a fault.

The anti-lock braking system has a fault.


Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.


Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.


Dynamic stability control

(DSC/ASR)

Engine autodiagnosis system

Low fuel level fl fl

ashing. fi fi

xed.

ashing.

xed. fi xed with the needle in the red zone.

The DSC/ASR regulation is operating.

The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle.

Unless it has been deactivated (button pressed and its indicator lamp on) the

DSC/ASR system has a fault.

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT or a quali fi ed workshop.

The engine management system has a fault.

The emission control system has a fault.

Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.


The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or quali fi ed workshop without delay.

When it fi rst comes on there remains approximately of fuel in the tank.

At this point, you begin to use the fuel reserve.

6 litres

Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.

This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a suf fi cient addition of fuel is made.

Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres .

Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.

Maximum coolant temperature fi xed with the needle in the red zone.

The temperature of the cooling system is too high.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary.

If the problem persists, contact a


Engine oil pressure fi xed.

There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.

Park, switch off the ignition and contact a


35

36


Battery charge fi xed.

The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Door(s) open

Front seat belt not fastened/ unfastened

Rear seat belt not fastened/ unfastened fi xed if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). fi xed and accompanied by an audible signal if the speed is above

6 mph (10 km/h).

A door, the boot, the lower tailgate or the bonnet

(with alarm only) is still open. fi xed then fl ashing accompanied by an increasing audible signal.

The driver and/or the front passenger has not fastened or has unfastened their seat belt. fi xed then fl ashing accompanied by an audible signal.

Close the door or boot.

One or more rear passengers have unfastened their seat belt.

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

on temporarily.

This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.

This lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Airbags fi xed.

One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.


Water in

Diesel fi xed.

The Diesel fuel fi lter contains water.

Risk of damage to the injection system on Diesel engines.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

Warning lamp

Directional headlamps

Underin fl ated tyre is on fl ashing. fi xed.

Coolant temperature indicator


The directional headlamps system has a fault.


The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.

Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.

This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase.

To top up the level:

) wait for the engine to cool,

) unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop,

) when the pressure has dropped, remove the cap,

) top up the level to the "MAX" mark.

With the engine running, when the needle is:

- in zone A , the temperature is correct,

- in zone , the temperature is too high; the max temperature warning lamp 1 and the central warning lamp come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

37

38

Service indicator

System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the screen.

The point at which the service is due is calculated using the distance covered since the last time the service indicator was reset.

Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and

1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due.

Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due

Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due.


5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off ; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation.

The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.

Service overdue

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, fl to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.

Example: the service is overdue by

186 miles (300 km).


Service indicator zero reset Retrieving the service information

You can access the service information at any time.

) Press the trip distance recorder zero reset button.

The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. .

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero.

The procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:

) switch off the ignition,

) press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,

) switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,

) when the display indicates , release the button; the spanner disappears.

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving conditions.

Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the two year service interval.

Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least fi ve minutes for the zero reset to be taken into account.

39

Engine oil level indicator

This information is displayed for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.

Oil level indicator fault

The level shown will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

This is indicated by the fl ashing of "OIL--" .

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Oil level correct

Oil level low

This is indicated by the fl ashing of "OIL" , linked with the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

If the low oil level is con fi rmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to prevent damage to the engine.

Dipstick

Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the dipstick and the oil fi ller cap on your engine.

There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

- A = max; never exceed this level (risk of damage to the engine),

- B = min; top up the level via the oil fi ller cap, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.

Total distance recorder

System which measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle during its life. change the units of distance

(miles or km) via the con fi guration menu.

To conform to legislation in the country you are crossing,

Lighting dimmer

System for manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel in relation to the exterior brightness.

Activation

When the vehicle lighting is on:

) press the button to change the brightness of the instrument panel,

) when the lighting reaches the minimum setting, release the button, then press again to increase it,

or

) when the lighting reaches the maximum setting, release the button, then press again to reduce it,

) when the lighting reaches the level of brightness required, release the button.

The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance travelled during a day or other period since it was reset to zero by the driver.

When the vehicle lighting is on, you cannot switch the instrument panel lighting off but you can adjust it to minimum.

Deactivation

When the lighting is off, or in day mode on vehicles fi tted with daytime running lamps, pressing the button does not have any effect.

) With the ignition on, press the button until zeros appear.

41

MONOCHROME SCREEN A

(WITHOUT AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

Displays on the screen

This displays the following information:

- time,

- date, temperature fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...),

- trip computer (refer to the end of the section).

Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control system faulty") or information messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some can be cleared by pressing the button.

There are three display control buttons:

- "ESC" to abandon the operation in progress,

- "MENU" to scroll through the menus or sub-menus,

- "OK" to select the menu or submenu required.

) Press the button to scroll through the various menus of the main menu :

- vehicle con fi guration,

- options,

- display settings,

- languages,

- units.

) Press the "OK" button to select the menu required.

42

* With air conditioning only.

Vehicle con fi

Options

Once the "Options" menu has been selected, you can start diagnostics of the status of the equipment (active, not active, faulty).

Display settings

Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following settings:

- year,

- month,

- day,

- hour,

- minutes,

- 12 or 24 hour mode.

Languages

Once the "Languages" menu has been selected, you can change the language used by the display (Français, Italiano,

Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil,

Türkçe, Deutsch, English, Espanol).

Units

Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you can change the units for:

- temperature (°C or °F),

- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

Once the "Vehicle con fi guration" menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):


- selective unlocking (refer to the

"Access" section),

- "guide-me-home" and welcome lighting

(refer to the "Visibility" section),








(refer to the "Driving" section),

- ...

) Once you have selected a setting, press the "OK" button to change its value.

) Wait for approximately ten seconds without any action to allow the changed data to be recorded or press the "ESC" button to cancel.

The screen then returns to the normal display.

For safety reasons, con fi guration of the multifunction screen by the driver must only be done when stationary.

43

MONOCHROME SCREEN A

(WITH AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

Controls Main menu

44

Displays in the screen

This displays the following information:

- time,

- date, temperature fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...),

- audio sources (radio, CD, ...),

- trip computer (refer to the corresponding section).

Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control system faulty") or information messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some can be cleared by pressing the < ] arrow" button.

From the audio equipment control panel, you can:

) press the button to gain access to the main menu ,

) press the " " or " " buttons to scroll through the items on the screen,

) press the "MODE" button to change the permanent application (trip computer, audio source, ...),

) press the " " or " " buttons to change a setting value,

) press the "OK" button to con fi rm,

or

) press this button to abandon the operation in progress.

) Press the "MENU" button for access to the

" " or " " buttons to scroll through the various menus:

, then press the

- radio-CD,

- vehicle con fi guration,

- options,

- display settings,

- languages,

- units.

) Press the "OK" button to select the menu required.

Radio-CD

With the audio equipment switched on, once the "Radio-CD" menu has been selected you can activate or deactivate the functions linked with use of the radio

(RDS, REG), the CD or the CD changer

(introscan, shuf fl e, CD repeat).

For more information on the

"Radio-CD" application, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.

* With air conditioning only.

Options

Once the "Options" menu has been selected, you can start diagnostics of the status of the equipment (active, not active, faulty).

Languages

Once the "Languages" menu has been selected, you can change the language used by the display.

Vehicle con fi

Display settings

Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following settings:

- year,

- month,

- day,

- hour,

- minutes,

- 12 or 24 hour mode.

Once the "Vehicle Con fi guration" menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):



"Access" section),

- guide-me-home and welcome lighting










- ...

) Once you have selected a setting, press the " " or " " buttons to change its value.

) Press the " " or " " buttons to switch respectively to the previous or next setting.

) Press the "OK" button to record the change and return to the normal display or press the < ] arrow" button to cancel.

Units

Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you can change the units of the following parameters:

- temperature (°C or °F),

- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).


45

46

MONOCHROME SCREEN C (WITH

PEUGEOT CONNECT SOUND (RD5))

Controls Main menu

From the audio equipment control panel, you can:

) press the " MENU " button for access to the main menu ,


Displays according to context:

- time,

- date,

) press the " " or " " buttons to scroll through the items on the screen,

) press the " MODE " button to change the permanent application (trip computer, audio source...),

- ambient temperature with air conditioning (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- status of the openings (doors, boot...),

) press the " " or " " buttons to change a setting value,

) press the "

or

OK " button to con fi rm,

- trip computer (see the corresponding section),

) Press the button for access to the main menu :

- audio functions,

- trip computer (see the corresponding section),

- personalisation-con fi guration,

- telephone (Bluetooth system).

) Press the" " or " " button to select the menu required, then con fi rm by pressing the " OK " button.

"Audio functions" menu

With the audio equipment switched on, once this menu has been selected you can activate or deactivate the functions linked with use of the radio (RDS, REG,

RadioText) or CD (introscan, shuf fl e,

CD repeat).

- screen and vehicle equipment parameter setting menus.

) press this button to abandon the operation in progress.

For more information on the

"Audio functions" application, refer to the Peugeot Connect

Sound (RD5) section.

Enter the distance to the destination

This allows you to enter an approximate value for the distance to the fi nal destination.

"Personalisation-

Configuration" menu

"Trip computer" menu

Once this menu has been selected, you can consult information concerning the status of the vehicle (alert log, status of the functions...).

) Press the button to gain access to the general menu.

) Press the arrows, then the button to select the menu.

) On the one of the applications:

menu, select

Alert log

This summarises the active warning messages, displaying them in succession in the multifunction screen

Once this menu has been selected, you can gain access to the following functions:

- de fi ne the vehicle parameters,

- display fi guration,

- choice of language.

Status of functions

This summarises the active or inactive status of the functions present on the vehicle.

De fi

Once this menu has been selected, you can activate or deactivate the following equipment (according to country):

- wiper linked with reverse gear (see


- selective unlocking (see the "Access" section),

- guide-me-home lighting (see the


- interior mood lighting (see the


- daytime running lamps (see the


- directional headlamps (see the



(see the "Driving" section),

- ...

47

48

"Telephone" menu

) Press the " " or " " buttons, then the

" OK " button to select the " OK " box and con fi rm or press the " < ] arrow " button to cancel.

With the audio equipment switched on, once this menu has been selected you can con fi gure your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), consult the various telephone directories (calls log, services...) and manage your communications (pick up, hang up, call waiting, secret mode...).

Example: setting of the duration of the guide-me-home lighting

) Press the " " or " " buttons, then the " OK " button to select the menu required.

Display con fi guration

Once this menu has been selected, you have access to the following settings:

For more information on the telephone application, refer to the Peugeot Connect Sound

(RD5) section.

- date and time setting,

- selection of the units.

) Press the " " or " " buttons, then the " OK " button to select the "Guideme-home headlamps" line.

Choice of language

Once this menu has been selected, you can change the screen display language.


) Press the " " or " " buttons to set the value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then press the " OK " button to con fi rm.

16/9 RETRACTABLE COLOUR SCREEN (WITH

PEUGEOT CONNECT NAVIGATION (RT6) OR

PEUGEOT CONNECT MEDIA NAVIGATION (NG4 3D))

Controls

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.


When the screen is unfolded, it displays the following information automatically and directly:

- time,

- date,

- altitude,

- ambient temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),

- warning and vehicle function status messages, displayed temporarily,

- trip computer information.

- satellite navigation system information.

From the audio system control panel:

) press the dedicated ,

"MUSIC"

"SETUP"

,

or

,

"PHONE" access to the corresponding menu,

,

button for

) turn the navigator to move the selection,

) press the navigator to con fi rm the selection,

or

Depending on the equipment fi tted to your vehicle, the trip computer information appears in either the multifunction screen or the instrument panel screen.

) press the this button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.

For operation of the retractable screen (opening, closing, adjustment of the position, etc.), refer to the paragraph "Access to the retractable screen".

49

50

"SETUP" menu

) Press the "SETUP" button for access to the tions:

"SETUP" menu. This allows you to select from the following func-

- "Languages" (Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RT6)),

- "Languages and voice functions"

(Peugeot Connect Media Navigation

(NG4 3D))

- "Date and time",

- "Display",

- "Vehicle parameters" (Peugeot

Connect Navigation (RT6)),

- "Units",

- "System".

Languages (Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RT6))

This menu allows you to select the language used by the display.

Languages and voice functions

(Peugeot Connect Media Navigation

(NG4 3D))

This menu allows you to:

- select the language used by the display,

- select the settings for voice recognition

(on/off, instructions on use, personal voice training...),

- adjust the volume of the voice synthesiser.

Date and time

This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time.

Display

This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/ night or auto mode).

Vehicle parameters (Peugeot

Connect Navigation (RT6))

This menu allows you to activate or deactivate certain driving and comfort equipment * :



"Access" section),

- guide-me-home and welcome lighting










- ...

Units

This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°C or °F) and fuel consumption (km/l, l/100 or mpg).

System

This menu allows you to restore the factory con fi guration, display the software version and activate scrolling text.



If you close the screen during operation of the audio and telematics system, it will re-open automatically when an outgoing telephone call is made, when a voice command is given or when a warning message linked with the STOP warning lamp is received.

Adjusting the position of the screen

Access to the retractable screen

This screen is opened and stored automatically.

However, you can also open it, store it and adjust it using the various manual controls:

- opening or storing by means of control A ,

- angle adjustments by means of control B .

It is also fi tted with safety auto-reverse protection.

Closing the screen

) With the screen open, press control A to store it.

The screen is stored automatically when the ignition is switched off, after approximately three seconds, if the audio and telematics system is off.

Safety auto-reverse

If the screen meets an obstacle as it opens or closes, the movement stops immediately and is reversed by a few millimetres.

After clearing the obstacle, issue the command required again.

When the screen is open, you can adjust it precisely in different ways:

) press the corresponding part of control to move the screen towards you or towards the windscreen,

or

) push or pull the screen gently by hand.

Opening the screen

) With the screen stored, press control A to open it.

The screen opens automatically when the ignition is switched on, when the audio and telematics system is switched on, when an outgoing telephone call is made, when a voice command is given and when a warning message linked with the STOP warning lamp is received.

If you wish the screen to open or close automatically when the audio and telematics system is switched on or off, the screen must not be closed when the audio and telematics system is operating.

Storing the position of the screen

The system has four pre-set positions in its memory.

Each time the screen is closed, the system stores the last position of the screen.

Each time the screen is re-opened, the system returns the screen to the pre-set position closest to that stored.

51

TRIP COMPUTER

System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption…).

Information displays

The trip computer provides the following information:

- range,

) The next press returns you to the normal display.

Zero reset

- current fuel consumption,

52

) Press the button, located at the end of the various items of trip computer data in succession.

, to display the

- average fuel consumption,

) Press the control for more than two seconds to reset to zero the distance travelled, the average fuel consumption and the average speed.

TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current information concerning the trip (range, consumption…).

Information displays

With the screen C or the colour screen

With the instrument panel screen

Monochrome screen C

16/9 colour screen

) Press the button, located at the end of the various trip computer tabs in succession.

, to display the

) Press the up and down arrows on the navigator to display the various trip computer tabs in succession.

Instrument panel screen

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the trip computer information appears on the multifunction screen or on the instrument panel screen.

53

54

- The current information tab with:

● the range,

● the current fuel consumption,

● the distance remaining to be travelled.

Trip zero reset

With the screen C or the colour screen

- The trip "1" tab with:

● the distance travelled,

● the average fuel consumption,

● the average speed,

With the instrument panel screen

- The trip

●

●

●

"2" tab with:

the distance travelled,

the average fuel consumption,

the average speed,

for the second trip.

) Pressing the button again takes you to a black screen.

A further press returns you to the normal display.

) When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds.

) When the required trip is displayed, press the button on the navigator for more than two seconds.

Trips and are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip can be used for daily fi gures, and trip for monthly fi gures.

Trip computer, a few definitions

Range

(miles or km)

The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank. Related to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.

This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a signi fi cant change in the current fuel consumption.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi lling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds

60 miles (100 km).

If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Current fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

Calculated over the last few seconds.

Distance travelled

(miles or km)

Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)


Distance remaining to destination

(miles or km)

This is the distance remaining to be travelled to the fi nal destination. It is either calculated instantly by the navigation system, if guidance is activated, or entered by the user.

If the distance is not entered, dashes are displayed in place of the digits.

Average speed

(mph or km/h)


Stop & Start time counter

(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fi tted with Stop &

Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

55

56

The air fl ow control enables you to increase or reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.

These controls are grouped together on control panel A on the centre console.

HEATING AND VENTILATION Controls

System which creates and maintains good conditions of comfort and visibility in the vehicle's passenger compartment.

The air circulating in the passenger compartment is fi ltered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver, the front passenger and rear passengers, according to the level of equipment.

The temperature control enables you to obtain the level of comfort required by mixing the air of the various circuits.

The air distribution control enables you to select the air vents used in the passenger compartment by the combined use of the associated buttons.

Air distribution

1.

Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.

2.

Front side window demisting/defrosting vents.

3.

Side adjustable air vents.

4.

Central adjustable air vents.

5.

Air outlets to the front footwells.

6.

Adjustable air vents for the rear passengers.

7.

Air outlets to the rear footwells.

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below:

) If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been parked in the sun for a considerable time, fi rst ventilate the passenger compartment for a few minutes.

Place the air fl ow control at a suf fi cient level to provide an adequate renewal of air in the passenger compartment.

) To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.

) Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recirculation may cause misting of the windows and side windows.

) Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the automatic air conditioning system.

) Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in good working order.

) Ensure that the passenger compartment fi lter is in good condition and have the fi lter elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).

We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment fi lter. Thanks to its second special active fi lter, it contributes to the puri fi cation of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment

(reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).

) The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results in an increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.

When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient temperatures, switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so improves towing capacity.

Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal.

) To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly.

) If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.

REAR VENTILATION

ADJUSTMENT

After pressing the "REAR" button, turn the adjustment dial of the rear side vents to decrease or increase the fl ow of air.

Take care not to obstruct the side vents and the air outlets on the fl oor.

To shut off the fl ow of air, close the vents and set the dial to 0.

57

58

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

1. Temperature adjustment

) Turn the dial from blue

(cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your requirements.

2. Air fl ow adjustment

) Turn the dial from position 1 to position 5 to obtain a comfortable air fl ow.

Footwells, front-rear

(closing the vents increases the fl ow to the footwells).

Central, side and rear vents.

The air distribution can be adapted by placing the dial in an intermediate position.

The air conditioning can only operate with the engine running.

If you place the air control in position 0 fl ow

(deactivation of the system), the temperature is no longer maintained at a comfortable level.

However, a slight fl ow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

)

4. Air intake/Air recirculation

The intake of exterior air limits misting of the windscreen and side windows.

The recirculation of interior air insulates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke.

Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to prevent deterioration of the air quality and demisting performance.

3. Air distribution adjustment

Windscreen and side windows. ) Press the button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on to con fi rm this.

Windscreen, side windows and front-rear footwells.

) Press the button again to permit the intake of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off to con fi rm this.

5. Air conditioning On / Off

The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

REAR SCREEN DEMIST -

DEFROST

The control button is located on the air conditioning system control panel.

Demisting/defrosting

It enables you to:

- lower the temperature, in summer,

- increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3 °C.

Switching on

The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running.

The marking on the control panel indicates the position of the controls to quickly demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows:

) place the air intake control in the

"Exterior air intake" position (indicator lamp off),

) place the air distribution dial 3 in the

"Windscreen position",

) place the air fl ow dial 2 in position 5

(maximum),

) place the temperature dial in the red position (hot).

Switching on

) Press the "A/C" button, the button's indicator lamp comes on.

The air conditioning does not operate when the air fl 2 is in position " 0 ".

To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use recirculation of interior air for a few moments. Then return to fresh air intake.

) Press this button to demist/defrost the rear screen and, depending on version, the door mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.

Switching off

The demist/defrost switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.

) It is possible to stop the demist/defrost operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the

STOP mode is not available.

Switching off

) Press the button again, the button's indicator lamp goes off.

Switching off may affect comfort levels

(humidity, condensation).

) Switch off the demist/defrost of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as it is no longer needed as lower current consumption results in reduced fuel consumption.

59

60

DUAL-ZONE DIGITAL AIR

CONDITIONING

When the engine is cold, to prevent too great a distribution of cold air, the air fl ow will reach its optimum level gradually.

In cold weather, it favours the distribution of warm air to the windscreen, side windows and footwells only.

On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value, there is no need to change the value displayed in order to obtain the comfort required more quickly. The system corrects the difference in temperature automatically and as quickly as possible.

The air conditioning only operates when the engine is running.

Automatic operation

1. Automatic comfort programme

) Press the button.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

We recommend the use of this mode: it permits automatic and optimised adjustment of all of the functions, passenger compartment temperature, air fl ow, air distribution and air recirculation, in accordance with the comfort value that you have chosen.

This system is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

2-3. Driver-passenger side adjustment

The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature to their requirements.

The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or

Fahrenheit.

) Turn control or the right respectively to decrease or increase this value.

to the left or to

A setting around the value 21 provides optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

You are advised to avoid a left / right setting difference of more than 3.

4. Automatic visibility programme

)

The automatic comfort programme may not be suf fi cient to quickly demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows

(humidity, several passengers, ice, etc.).

In this case, select the automatic visibility programme.

The system automatically controls the air conditioning, the air fl ow and the air intake and provides optimum distribution of the ventilation to the windscreen and side windows.

) To switch it off, press the "visibility" button again or press the button, the indicator lamp in the button goes off or the indicator lamp on the "AUTO" button comes on.

Manual operation

If you wish, you can make a different choice from that offered by the system by changing a setting. The other functions will still be controlled automatically.

) Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the system to completely automatic operation.

5. Air conditioning On / Off

) Press this button to switch off the air conditioning.

6. Air distribution adjustment

) Press one or more buttons to direct the air fl ow towards:

Switching the system off could result in discomfort (humidity, condensation).

) Press this button again to return to automatic operation of the air conditioning. The indicator lamp in the

"A/C" button comes on.

To obtain cool air sooner, you can use air recirculation for a few moments.

Then return to exterior air intake.

In winter, we recommend that you close the rear vents.

- the windscreen and side windows

(demisting or defrosting),

- the windscreen, the side windows and the vents,

- the windscreen, the side windows, the vents and the footwells,

- the vents and the footwells,

- the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells.

For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, it is possible to exceed the minimum value 14 or the maximum value 28.

) Turn control or 3 to the left until (low) is displayed or to the right until (high) is displayed.

61

62

7. Air fl ow adjustment

) Turn this control to the left to decrease the air fl ow or to the right to increase the air fl ow.

The air fl ow indicator lamps, between the two fans, come on progressively according to the value requested.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the

STOP mode is not available.

8. Air recirculation

Switching the system off/on

) Press this button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on.

- Air closed/intake (automatic mode).

Press this button, the warning lamp comes on.

- Forced closing of the air intake

(manual mode). Press this button to recirculate the interior air, the warning lamp come on.

Air recirculation enables the passenger compartment to be isolated from exterior odours and smoke.

) As soon as possible, press the

"auto" button to allow the intake of exterior air and avoid the misting of windows.

) Turn the air fl ow control to the left until all of the indicator lamps go off.

This action switches off all of the functions of the system.

Temperature related comfort is no longer guaranteed but a slight fl ow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.

) Turn the air fl ow dial to the right or press the button to reactivate the system with the values set before it was switched off.

Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the system off.

9. Rear ventilation (Rear)

) Press this button to allow the air to circulate towards the rear. The temperature will be equal to the left-hand comfort value for the rear left passengers and equal to the right-hand comfort value for the rear right passengers.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL

ADJUSTMENTS

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

Forwards-backwards

) Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

Height Seat back angle

) Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as required, to obtain the position required.

) Push the control rearwards.

63

64

DRIVER'S ELECTRIC SEAT

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

The electrical functions of the driver's seat are active approximately one minute after opening the front door. They are deactivated approximately one minute after the ignition is switched off and in economy mode.

To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.

Forwards-backwards

) Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.

Cushion height and angle

) Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required height.

) Tilt the front part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required angle.

Backrest angle

) Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat back.

Head restraint height and angle adjustment

) To raise the head restraint, pull it forwards and upwards at the same time.

) To remove the head restraint, press the lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.

) To put the head restraint back in place, engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat back.

) To lower the head restraint, press the lug and the head restraint at the same time.

) To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt its lower part forwards or rearwards.

The head restraint is fi tted with a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact.

The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head.

Manual lumbar adjustment

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.

) Turn the knob manually to obtain the desired level of lumbar support.

Heated seats control

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

) Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side of each front seat, to switch on and select the level of heating required:

0: Off.

1 : Low.

2 : Medium.

3 : High.

65

Table position, front passenger seat

66

Folding the seat backrest

) Raise the armrest and fold up the

"aircraft" style table, fi xed on the back of the seat.

) Check that no object, either on or underneath the seat, could hinder its movement.

) To make the operation easier, place the head restraint in the low position

(if the seat is in the fully forward position).

) If your vehicle is fi tted with the video pack, place the protective cover on the head restraint.

) Lift the control, located behind the seat, then guide the seat back forwards.

This position, associated with that of the rear seats, allows you to transport long objects inside the vehicle.

The maximum weight on the seat is

30 kg.

Returning the seat to the normal position

) Guide the seat backrest rearwards until it locks in place.

When the seat backrest is in this position, only the 2 used.

row passenger seat located behind the driver can be

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS ROW SEATS

Forwards-backwards adjustment

Placing a seat in the "comfort" position

The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions:

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.

To lower it, press the lug then the head restraint.

To remove it, place it in the high position, push the lug and pull it upwards.

To re fi t it, engage the head restraint rods in the holes taking care to remain in line with the seat back.

Lift the control A , located at the front of the seat, then adjust the seat to the position desired.

"Comfort" position

) Pull on the control and guide the seat rearwards.

The backrest reclines and the seat base moves forward slightly.

Returning the seat to the initial position

) Pull on the control and allow the seat to come forwards.

Always supervise any movements of seats by children.

Never drive with the head restraints removed, they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

The three 2 nd row seats are independent of each other and all the same width.

They all have a "comfort" position.

67

Flat floor

Each seat can be folded onto the fl oor to enable you to modify your vehicle’s interior space.

Folding the seat from the 2 nd row Folding the seat from the boot Repositioning seat

68

) Place the seats as far towards the rear as possible.

) Pull fi rmly upwards on strap , to unlock the seat; keep pulling until the seat is fully folded.

) Push the backrest slightly forwards so that the backrest pivots, folding onto the seat base. The assembly then lowers onto the fl oor.

When loading, for example, you can fold the seat or seats directly from the boot, once you have folded the 3 rd row seats (7 seat version).

) Place the seats as far towards the rear as possible.

) Pull on the strap to release the chosen seat and push the backrest gently forwards.

) If necessary, return the 2 and lock them. nd row seat rigid panels to their initial position

) Raise the backrest and push it rearwards until it locks.

Before moving the 3 the 2 nd

row seats (7 seat version), return

row seat rigid panels to their initial position and lock them.

Emergency exit: if the fi rst system

C ) fails, strap enables the

3 rd row passengers to exit quickly.

To avoid damaging the mechanism, the strap unclips under excessive force. Simply reclip it to restore the system to working order.

Supervise any movement of seats by children.

Rigid panel Entering/Exiting the 3

rd

row

(7 seat version)

Repositioning the seat, from the outside, with the door open

If there are passengers seated in the

3 rd row (7 seat version):

) Manually return the assembly as far as possible rearwards; the seat does not return as far as the maximum rearwards position so as to retain leg space for the 3 rd row passengers.

) Fold the seat base. nd row seat backrest has a rigid panel attached.

This panel enables you:

- to have a continuous load surface in the boot, whatever the positions of the seats,

- to avoid having objects sliding under the 2 row seats. 30 kg maximum on each panel.

) Raise the aircraft style table on the

2 nd row seat if it is down.

) Hold the control in the raised position, the seat unlocks and the seat base comes up against the backrest.

) Push the seat backrest forwards, holding the control F forwards.

Releasing/Locking the rigid panel

) Before deploying the rigid panels, check that the 2 nd row seats are positioned as far towards the rear as possible.

) Slide the latch on the panel upwards, to release it.

) Return the panel to its initial position,

E downwards, to lock it in place.

69

RD

ROW SEATS

(7 SEAT VERSION)

Concertina boards Installing a seat Storing a seat

70

Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot be separated from the vehicle, cover the rd row seats, when these are in the folded position.

Folding the concertina boards

) Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the board will fold like a concertina. rd row seats are upright, these concertina boards can be left either:

- fl at behind the seats,

- in the vertical position,

thereby leaving a storage area available.

The two rigid boards can each support a maximum of 100 kg.

) Remove the load space screen.

) If necessary, return the 2 lock them. nd row rigid panels to their initial position and

) Correctly position the concertina board vertically behind the seat.

) Pull on the control G , located behind the seat backrest. The backrest tilts rearwards pulling the seat base with it. The seat locks in the open position.

) Lower the head restraints.

) Correctly position the concertina board vertically behind the seat.

) Pull on the control H , located at the bottom of the seat backrest. The seat is released.

) Next push the backrest gently forwards. The backrest pivots folding onto the seat base. The seat base then folds into the stowage area provided for that purpose.

) Reposition the concertina boards over the folded seats.

Before moving the 3 rd row seats, return the rigid panels of nd row seats to the upright position and lock them in place.

Do not try to fold a 3 rd row seat that has not fi rst had the backrest fully locked in place.

Do not leave objects either on or underneath the seat bases of the 3 rd row seats when you are folding them.

Do not leave your hand on the control as you fold the seats, as you risk trapping your fi ngers.

Examples of configurations

7 seats

5 seats

SEAT MODULARITY AND

THE VARIOUS SEAT

CONFIGURATIONS

Designed to be modular, your vehicle offers numerous seat installation and loading con fi gurations.

Operations to change the existing con fi guration must only be carried out when stationary (see paragraphs "Rear seats".

Transport (4 seats)

Transporting long objects

Loading a large volume

71

72

MIRRORS

Adjustment Folding

- Automatic: lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.

- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

If the mirrors are folded using control , they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked.

Pull again on control A .

Door mirrors

Each fi tted with an adjustable mirror glass permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking.

They can also be folded for parking in con fi ned spaces.

) Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.

) Move control B in all four directions to adjust.

) Return control A to the central position.

Unfolding

- Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.

- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.

Demisting - Defrosting

If your vehicle is fi tted with heated mirrors, the demisting-defrosting operates by switching on the heated rear screen

(refer to the "Rear screen demist-defrost" page).

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear.

Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Fold the mirrors when putting your vehicle through an automatic car wash.

The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running.

Rear view mirror

Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...

Automatic day/night model

Manual day/night model

By means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle, this system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.

) When stationary , pull the control lever to release the adjustment mechanism.

) Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.

) Push the control lever to lock the adjustment mechanism.

Adjustment

) Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.

Day/night position

) Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-dazzle position.

) Push the lever to change to the normal

"day" position.

In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".

73

74

REMOTE CONTROL KEY

System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.

Complete unlocking using the key

) Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock to unlock the vehicle.

Unlocking is con fi rmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.

Each unlocking is con fi rmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time as the fi rst unlocking action.

The selective unlocking is only available on versions fi tted with deadlocking.

The complete or selective unlocking parameter is set via the multifunction screen con fi guration menu. Selective unlocking using the remote control

) Press the open padlock once to unlock the driver's door only.

Complete unlocking is activated by default.

) Press the open padlock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

Unlocking the vehicle

Unfolding the key

) First press this button to unfold the key.

Complete unlocking using the remote control

Selective unlocking using the key

) Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock once to unlock the driver's door only.

) Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.

) Press the open padlock to unlock the vehicle.

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking using the remote control

) Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Deadlocking using the remote control

) Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle completely or press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).

) Press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).

Normal locking using the key

) Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely.

Locking is con fi rmed by fi xed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

If one of the doors or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place.

When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will relock automatically after thirty seconds unless a door is opened.

) Press the closed padlock again within fi ve seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking using the key

) Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold it in this position for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking (according to version).

) Turn the key to the right again within fi ve seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking is con fi rmed by fi xed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.

According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative.

It also deactivates the manual central control button.

Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Folding the key

) First press this button to fold the key.

If you do not press the button when folding the key, there is a risk of damage to the mechanism.

Locating your vehicle

) Press the closed padlock to locate your locked vehicle in a car park.

This is indicated by lighting of the direction indicators for a few seconds.

75

76

Anti-theft protection Starting the vehicle

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.

This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

) Insert the key in the ignition switch.

The system recognises the starting code.

) Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to position 3 (Starting) .

) When the engine starts, release the key.

Energy economy mode

1-

Stop ), you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, the wipers, the dipped headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined period of thirty minutes.

For more information, refer to the "Practical information - Energy economy mode" section. In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen.

In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.

Keep safely the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.

A heavy object (key fob...), attached to the key and weighing down on its shaft in the ignition switch, could cause a malfunction.

Switching the vehicle off

) Immobilise the vehicle.

) Turn the key fully towards you to position 1 (Stop) .

) Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Remote control problem

Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.

) First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock or lock your vehicle.

) Then, reinitialise the remote control.

If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.

Changing the battery

Reinitialisation

) Switch off the ignition.

) Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on) .

) Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds.

) Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.

The remote control is fully operational again.

Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.

If the battery is fl at, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

) Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.

) Slide the at battery out of its location.

) Slide the new battery into its location observing the original direction.

) Clip the casing.

) Reinitialise the remote control.

77

78

Lost keys

Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal identi fi cation documents and if possible the key code label.

The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.

Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.

No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more dif fi cult in an emergency.

However, the vehicle unlocks automatically in the event of a serious impact causing airbag deployment.

As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period.

In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modi fi cations to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collection point.

ALARM

System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle.

It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an anti-tamper function.

Exterior perimiter protection

The system detects opening of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the bonnet.

Interior volumetric protection

The system detects any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.

The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window or moves inside the vehicle.

If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a window partially open, deactivate the interior volumetric protection.

Locking the vehicle with full alarm

Locking the vehicle with exterior protection alarm only

Activation

) Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.

) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.

The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp in button A fl ashes once per second.

Deactivation of the interior volumetric protection


) Within ten seconds, press button until the indicator lamp is on continuously.

) Get out of the vehicle.

) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.

The exterior protection alarm alone remains activated; the indicator lamp in button A fl ashes once per second.

To be effective, this deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.

Anti-tamper function

The system detects the putting out of service of its components.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put the wires of the siren, the central control or the battery out of service.

Deactivation

) Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.

The alarm is deactivated; the indicator lamp in button A switches off.

Reactivation of the interior volumetric protection

) Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.

) Relock the vehicle using the remote control.

The alarm is activated again with both types of protection; the indicator lamp in button A switches off.

Do not make any modi fi cations to the alarm system, this could cause malfunctions.

79

80

Triggering

This is indicated by sounding of the siren and fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately thirty seconds.

After it has been triggered, the alarm is again operational.

If the alarm is triggered ten times in succession, the eleventh time will result in it becoming inactive. ton

If the indicator lamp in but-

A fl ashes rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this fl ashing stops immediately.

To avoid triggering the alarm when washing your vehicle, lock it using the key in the driver's door lock.

Do not activate the alarm before disconnecting the battery, otherwise the siren will sound.

Failure of the remote control

) Unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

) Open the door; the alarm is triggered.

) Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm

) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.

Automatic operation *

Depending on the legislation in force in your country, one of these cases may occur:

- 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked using the remote control, the alarm is activated, regardless of the status of the doors and boot.

- 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the alarm is activated.

) To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, fi rst press the unlocking button on the remote control.

Malfunction

When the ignition is switched on, illumina-

A for ten seconds indicates a siren fault.



ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows

System intended to open or close a window manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system and a system for deactivation in the event of misuse of the rear controls.

Manual mode

) Press or pull the control gently. The window stops when the control is released.

After approximately ten consecutive complete opening/closing movements of the window, a protection function is activated to prevent damage to the electric window motor.

After this, you have approximately one minute within which to close the window.

Once the window is closed, the controls will become available again after approximately 40 minutes.

Automatic mode

) Press or pull the control fi rmly. The window opens or closes fully when the control is released.

) Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window.

Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers again.

1.

Driver

2.

Passenger

3.

Rear right

4.

Rear left

5.

Deactivation of the rear electric windows and doors.

The electric window controls remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off or until the vehicle is locked after a front door is opened.

If one of the passenger windows cannot be operated from the driver's door control panel, carry out the operation from the control pad of the passenger door concerned, and vice versa.

If the window cannot be closed

(for example, in the presence of ice), immediately after the movement is reversed:

) Press and hold the control until the window opens fully.

) Then pull the control immediately and hold it until the window closes.

) Continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not operational during these operations.

81

82

Reinitialisation

If a window does not rise automatically, its operation must be reinitialised:

) pull the control until the window stops,

) release the control and pull it again, repeat these operations until the window closes fully,

) continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed,

) press the control to lower the window automatically to the low position,

) when the window has reached the low position, press the control again for approximately one second.


Deactivation of the rear electric windows and doors

) For the safety of your children, with the ignition on, press control to deactivate the rear electric window controls regardless of their position.

It is still possible to open the doors from the outside and operate the rear electric windows from the driver's control panel.

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a malfunction of the electric child lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

If an obstacle is encountered during operation of the electric windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the controls for the passengers' electric windows, they must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the windows.

The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the windows.

Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are deactivated.

Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are activated.

This control also deactivates the interior controls for the rear doors (see "Child lock").

DOORS

Opening

From outside

From inside

) After unlocking the vehicle completely using the remote control or the key, pull the door handle.

) Pull the door control (front or rear) to open the door; this unlocks this vehicle completely.

The interior door controls do not operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.

Closing

When a door or the boot is not closed correctly:

- When the engine is running , this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds,

- When the vehicle is moving (speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds.

83

84

Centralised locking control

System which provides full manual locking or unlocking of the doors from the inside.

When locking/deadlocking from the outside

When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from the outside, the red indicator lamp fl ashes and the button is inactive.

) After normal locking, pull the interior door lever to unlock the vehicle.

) After deadlocking, it is necessary to use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle.

A con fi rmation message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Deactivation

) Press this button again for more than two seconds.

A con fi rmation message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal.

Automatic central locking

Locking

) Press this button to lock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.

System which provides full automatic locking or unlocking of the doors and boot while driving, if they are closed correctly.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

Activation

Locking

When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and boot lock automatically.

If one of the doors is open, the automatic central locking does not take place.

If the boot is open, the automatic central locking of the doors is active.

If one of the doors is open, the central locking from the inside does not take place.

Unlocking

) Press this button again to unlock the vehicle.

The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.

) Press this button for more than two seconds.

Unlocking

) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this button to unlock the doors and boot temporarily.

In the event of an impact, the doors unlock automatically.

Emergency control

System which locks or unlocks the doors mechanically in the event of a malfunction of the battery or of the central locking.

In the event of a fault with the central locking, you must disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so ensure the complete locking of the vehicle.

BOOT

Locking the driver's door

) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the right.

Unlocking the driver's door

) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the left.

Locking the front and rear passenger doors

Opening

) After unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the key, pull the handle and raise the tailgate.

Closing

) Lower the tailgate using the interior grab handle.

If the tailgate is not closed correctly:

- when the engine is running , this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds,

- when the vehicle is moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen for a few seconds.

) Insert the key in the lock, located on the edge of the door, then turn it one eighth of a turn .

Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors

) Pull the interior door opening control.

When selective unlocking is activated, the boot can also be opened by a second press on the open padlock on the remote control.

85

Tailgate release

System allowing the mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.

86

Unlocking

) Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.

) Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.

) Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.

FUEL TANK

Capacity of the tank: approximately

60 litres.

Low fuel level

To fi ll the tank safely:

) the engine must be switched off,

) open the fuel fi ller fl ap,

) insert the key in the cap, then turn it to the left,

When the low fuel level is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen. When the lamp fi rst comes on, there is mately 6 litres of fuel remaining.

Until suf fi cient fuel has been added, this warning lamp appears every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message. When driving, this audible signal and message are repeated with increasing frequency, as the fuel level drops towards "0" .

) remove the cap and secure it on the hook, located on the inside of the fl ap,

) fi ll the tank, but the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle ; this could cause malfunctions.

You must refuel to avoid running out of fuel.

If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also to the "Checks" section.

When refuelling is complete:

) put the cap back in place,

) turn the key to the right, then remove it from the cap,

) close the ller fl ap.

Refuelling

A label af fi xed to the inside of the fi ller fl ap reminds you of the type of fuel to be used according to your engine.

More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in order to be registered by the fuel gauge.

Operating fault

A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indicated by the return to zero of the fuel gauge needle.


The key cannot be removed from the lock until the cap is put back on the tank.

Opening the cap may trigger an inrush of air. This vacuum, which is completely normal, is caused by the sealing of the fuel system.

With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

87

88

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines

Quality of the fuel used for

Diesel engines (DIESEL) *

DIESEL

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing 10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European standards

EN 228 and EN 15376.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.

For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards

(Diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel engines; however, this use is subject to strict application of the special servicing conditions. Contact a


For Russia only, the use of RON 92 unleaded petrol is possible.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel

(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited

(risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Mechanical device which prevents fi lling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from fi lling with the wrong fuel.

Located in the fi ller neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the fi ller cap is removed.

Operation

When a petrol the fuel fi fi ller nozzle is introduced into

ller neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the fl ap. The system remains closed and prevents fi lling.

Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type fi ller nozzle.

Travelling abroad

As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible.

Before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you want to travel.

It remains possible to use a fuel can to fi ll the tank.

In order to ensure a good fl ow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the fl ap of the misfuel prevention device and pour slowly.

* According to country of sale.

LIGHTING CONTROLS

System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.

Main lighting

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle are designed to adapt the lighting progressively in relation to the climatic conditions and so improve the driver's visibility:

- sidelamps, to be seen,

- dipped beam headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,

- main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear,

- directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering.

Model without AUTO lighting

Additional lighting

Other lamps are installed to ful fi l the requirements of particular driving conditions:

- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,

- front foglamps for even better visibility,

- daytime running lamps to be seen during the day.

Model with AUTO lighting

Programming

Various automatic lighting control modes are also available according to the following options:

Manual controls

The lighting is controlled directly by the

A and the stalk B .

A.

Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it to position the symbol required facing the mark.

Lighting off / daytime running lamps.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.

B.

Stalk for switching headlamps: pull the stalk towards you to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps.

In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp fl ash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

Displays

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel con fi rms that the lighting selected is on.

89

90

Model with rear foglamp only

Model with front and rear foglamps

C.

Fog lamps selection ring.

Rear foglamp

This operates with dipped and main beam headlamps.

) To switch on the foglamp, turn the ring C forwards.

) To switch off the foglamp, turn the ring C rearwards.

When the lighting is switched on automatically (with AUTO model), the dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the rear foglamp is switched off.

When the lighting is switched on automatically (with AUTO model), the dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the rear foglamp is switched off.

When the lighting is switched off automatically (with AUTO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and the sidelamps will remain on.

In good or rainy weather, by both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamp are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers.

Do not forget to switch off the front foglamps and the rear foglamp when they are no longer necessary.

Front and rear foglamps

The rear foglamp operates with the dipped and main beam headlamps.

The front foglamps also operate with the sidelamps.

) To switch on the rear foglamp, turn the ring C forwards.

) To switch on the front foglamps, turn the ring C forwards again.

) To switch off the rear foglamp, turn the ring C rearwards.

) To switch off the front foglamps, turn the ring C rearwards again.

Lighting on audible warning

When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps switch off automatically, unless guide-me-home lighting is activated.

If the lighting is switched on manually after switching off the ignition, there is an audible signal when a front door is opened to warn the driver that they have forgotten to switch off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.

In some weather conditions

(e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Manual guide-me-home lighting EXTERIOR WELCOME

LIGHTING

The temporary illumination of the dipped beam headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.

The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated according to the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor.

Switching on

) Press the open padlock on the remote control.

They come on when the engine is started.

Depending on the destination country, they are used for:

- daytime running lamps in day mode and sidelamps in night mode (they are brighter when daytime running lamps),

or

- sidelamps in day and night mode.

Programming

In countries in which this function is not imposed by regulations, with the vehicle stationary, use the navigator to activate or deactivate the function in the multifunction screen con fi guration menu.

The dipped beam headlamps and the sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

Switching off

The exterior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.

Switching on

) With the ignition off, " fl ash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.

) A further "headlamp fl ash" switches the function off.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

Programming

The lighting duration is selected via the vehicle confi guration menu.

The sidelamps and number plate lamps come on as well.

For countries where the function is a legal requirement, it is activated by default.

The duration of the welcome lighting is associated with and identical to that of the automatic guide-me-home lighting.

91

Automatic illumination of headlamps

Operating fault

When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.

As soon as the brightness returns to a suf fi cient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal.


In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect suf will not come on automatically. fi cient light. In this case, the lighting

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

Automatic "guide-me-home" lighting

When the automatic illumination of headlamps function is activated, under low ambient light the dipped beams headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off.

Programming

Activation or deactivation, as well as the duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set in the vehicle con fi guration menu.

92

Activation

) Turn the ring to the position. The activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message in the screen.

Deactivation

) Turn the ring to another position.

Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message in the screen.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF

HALOGEN HEADLAMPS

Travelling abroad

If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers.


AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT

OF THE XENON HEADLAMPS

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the height of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

0.

1 or 2 people in the front seats.

-.

3

1.

5 people.

-.

Intermediate

2.

5 people + maximum authorised load.

-.

Intermediate

3.

Driver + maximum authorised load.

The initial setting is position "0" .

In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, this system corrects the height of the xenon headlamps beam automatically and when stationary, in relation to the load in the vehicle.

If a malfunction occurs, this warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

The system then places your headlamps in the lowest position.

If a malfunction occurs, do not touch the xenon bulbs. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

93

94

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING

When the dipped or main beam headlamps are on, this function enables the light beams to provide improved lighting of the side of the road when cornering.

The use of this function, from approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and associated with the xenon headlamps only, considerably improves the quality of your lighting when cornering. with directional lighting without directional lighting

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the vehicle con fi guration menu.

Operating fault

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message in the screen.


When stationary or moving at very low speed or when reverse gear is engaged, the function is inactive.

The status of the function remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

WIPER CONTROLS

System for selection and control of the various front and rear wiping modes for the elimination of rain and cleaning.

The vehicle's front and rear wipers are designed to improve the driver's visibility progressively according to the climatic conditions.

Model with intermittent wiping

Programming

Various automatic wiper control modes are also available according to the following options:

- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,

- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

Model with AUTO wiping

Manual controls

The wiper commands are issued directly by the driver by means of the stalk A and the ring B .

Windscreen wipers

A.

Wiping speed selection stalk.

Fast (heavy rain).

Normal (moderate rain).

Intermittent (proportional to the speed of the vehicle).

Off.

Single wipe (press down and release).

or

Automatic, then single wipe (see the corresponding section).

95

96

Rear wiper B.

Rear wiper selection ring:

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Windscreen and headlamp wash

Wash-wipe (set duration).

If a signi fi cant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the multifunction screen con fi guration menu.

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.

) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fi xed period.

The headlamp washers only operate when the dipped beam headlamps are on .

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the multifunction screen con tion menu. by default. fi gura-

This function is activated

Screenwash/headlamp wash low level

In the case of vehicles fi tted with headlamp washers, when the minimum level of the reservoir is reached, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.

The warning lamp is displayed when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is operated, until the reservoir is re fi lled.

Next time you stop, re fi ll the screenwash/headlamp wash reservoir.

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

The automatic rain sensitive wipers must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for more than one minute, by pushing the stalk downwards.

Special position of the windscreen wipers

Activation

This is controlled manually by the driver by pushing the stalk downwards to the

"AUTO" position.

It is accompanied by a message in the screen.

Operating fault

If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.


This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades.

It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to detach the blades from the windscreen.

Switching off

This is controlled manually by the driver by moving the stalk upwards then returning it to position .

It is accompanied by a message in the screen.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash.

In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper blades, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

) Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute after switching off the ignition places the blades vertically on the screen.

) To park the blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.

To maintain the effectiveness of the " fl at-blade" type of wiper blades, it is advisable to:

- handle them with care,

- clean them regularly using soapy water,

- avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen,

- replace them at the fi rst signs of wear.

97

98

COURTESY LAMPS

1.

Front courtesy lamp

2.

Map reading lamps

3.

Rear courtesy lamp

Front and rear courtesy lamps

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

- when the vehicle is unlocked,

- when the key is removed from the ignition,

- when a door is opened,

- when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.

When the front courtesy lamp is in the "permanent lighting" position, the rear courtesy lamp will also come on, unless it is in the "permanently off" position.

To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, place it in the "permanently off" position.

It switches off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on,

- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Map reading lamps

) With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

- with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,

- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,

- with the engine running, unlimited.

Take care not to place anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

DOOR MIRROR SPOTLAMPS INTERIOR WELCOME LIGHTING

The remote switching on of the passenger compartment lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It operates with the automatic illumination of headlamps.

INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

Switching on

) Press the open padlock on the remote control.

The courtesy lamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

To make your approach to the vehicle easier, these illuminate:

- the zones facing the driver’s and passenger’s doors,

- the zones forward of the door mirrors and rearward of the front doors.

Switching off

The interior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time or when one of the doors is opened.

Switching on

The spotlamps come on:

- when you unlock the vehicle,

- when you remove the key from the ignition,

- when you open a door,

- when you use the remote control.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivated via the multifunction screen con fi guration menu.

Switching on

At night, the front courtesy lamp mood lamp comes on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on.

Switching off

The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.

Switching off

They are timed to go off automatically.

The duration of the welcome lighting is associated with and identical to that of the automatic guide-me-home lighting.

99

FOOTWELL LIGHTING BOOT LAMP TORCH

100

The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

This comes on automatically when the boot is opened and switches off automatically when the boot is closed.

Portable lamp, fi tted in the boot wall, which can be used to light the boot or as a torch.

For the torch function, refer to the "Fittings" section.

Activation

Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy lamps. The lighting comes on when one of the doors is opened.

Different lighting times are available:

- when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes,

- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,

- when the engine is running, no limit.

Operation

Once engaged fi rmly in its location, it comes on automatically when the boot is opened and switches off automatically when the boot is closed.

It operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately

45 minutes and recharges while you are driving.

Observe the polarities when fi tting the rechargeable batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with normal single-use batteries.

INTERIOR FITTINGS

1.

Spectacles storage

2.

Sun visor

3.

Grab handle with coat hook

4.

Storage compartment

5.

Storage compartment under the steering wheel

6.


7.

Illuminated glove box

8.

Door pockets

9.

Front 12 V accessory socket

(120 W)

10.


11.

Peugeot Connect USB

12.

Cup holder

13.

Rear 12 V accessory socket

(120 W)

101

SUN VISOR DRIVER'S STORAGE

COMPARTMENTS

ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX

102

Component which protects against sunlight from the front or the side, also equipped with an illuminated courtesy mirror.

) With the ignition on, raise the concealing fl ap; the mirror is lit automatically.

This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket holder.

Storage box

This has storage areas for the handbook pack, ...

) To open, pull the handle then tilt the box.

Card holder

This can be used for a toll payment ticket or parking card, for example.

This has storage areas, audio sockets for a portable player and a location for the SIM card (only with Peugeot Connect

Media Navigation (NG4 3D)), ...

) To open the glove box, raise the handle.

The lamp comes on when the lid is opened.

Coin storage

To connect a portable player or a SIM card, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.

Storage

CENTRE CONSOLE

Storage device for the driver and front passenger.

USB PLAYER - PLUG

Storage

12 V ACCESSORY SOCKETS

) Slide the cover for access to the

10.5 litre storage compartment.

This can contain 2 half-litre bottles.

A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air.

This connection box consists of a jack auxiliary socket and/or a USB port.

It permits the connection of portable equipment, such as a digital audio player of the iPod ® type or a USB memory stick.

It reads the audio fi le formats (mp3, ogg, wma, wav...) which are transmitted to your audio equipment and played via the vehicle's speakers.

You can manage these fi les using the steering mounted controls or the audio equipment control panel and display them on the multifunction screen.

) To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 Watts), remove the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.

Exceeding the maximum power could result in damage to your accessory.

When in use connected to the USB port, the portable equipment charges automatically.

For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.

103

104

MATS

Removable carpet protection.

Refitting

To re fi t the mat on the driver's side:

) position the mat correctly,

) re fi t the fi xings by pressing,

) check that the mat is secured correctly.

Fitting

When fi tting the mat for the fi rst time, on the driver's side use only the fi xings provided in the wallet attached.

The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

- only use mats which are suited to the fi xings already present in the vehicle; these fi xings must be used,

The use of mats not approved by

PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control/speed limiter.

Removal

To remove the mat on the driver's side:

) move the seat as far back as possible,

) unclip the xings,

) remove the mat.

"AIRCRAFT" TYPE TABLES

Installed on the back of each front seat, these allow you to set down objects.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

UNDER THE REAR FOOTWELLS

) To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in the low position.

) To store the table, raise it, passing the point of resistance, to the high position.

Depending on the con fi guration, the vehicle has storage compartments under the footwells, located forward of the outer rear seats. Access is via clipped fl aps with a handle A .

It is located under the driver's seat

(manual adjustment).

Opening

) Raise the front of the drawer and pull it.

Do not place heavy objects in the drawers.

On the passenger side, do not forget to fold the "aircraft" type table before placing the seat in the table position.

Do not place hard or heavy objects on the table. They could become dangerous projectiles in the event of emergency braking or impact.

105

106

REAR MULTIMEDIA

Two separate sources can be connected via the RCA connectors (red and white).

The audio is heard through two wireless headphones with

Bluetooth technology which operate with rechargeable batteries.

The button allows you to pair the headphones with the screen: lefthand side, B right-hand side.

You have a 12 V charger with two outputs permitting simultaneous charging of both headphones.

It is also possible to connect a 3rd set of

Bluetooth headphones.

If your seat is in the table position, position a cover to avoid damaging the screen.

Multimedia system permitting the connection of any external portable system: iPod

Video, games consoles, DVD player, …

Two separate sources can be connected via the RCA connectors (yellow).

The video is displayed in two

7" screens, integrated in the head restraints.

Set-up

) With the engine running, connect your portable system to the RCA connectors (e.g. with AV1 on the left).

) Press the system's ON/OFF button, the indicator lamp comes on and the

AV1 indicator lamps come on.

) Press and hold the ON/OFF button on the headphones, the indicator lamp on the headphones fl ashes in blue.

) Press and hold the system's ON/

OFF button, the pairing with the headphones is complete when the blue indicator lamps on the headphones and on the system (in the shape of headphones) are on continuously.

) Press the ON/OFF buttons in the screens if you have a video source.

) Start playing your portable system.

These covers also conceal each screen.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF

Component which has a tinted glass panoramic surface to increase the light and visibility in the passenger compartment.

Fitted with an electric blind in several sections to improve temperature and noise related comfort.

Reinitialisation: if the blind's supply is cut off while it is moving, the safety anti-pinch must be reinitialised.

) Press the control until the blind is fully closed.

) Continue to press for at least

3 seconds. A slight movement of the blind will then be noticeable, con fi rming the reinitialisation.

Automatic mode

) Pull or press control fi rmly, going beyond the point of resistance.

One press opens or closes the blind completely.

Pressing the control again stops the blind.

If the blind re-opens during a closing manoeuvre, and immediately after it stops.

) Pull the control until the blind is fully open.

) Press the control until the blind is fully closed.


One-touch electric blind

There are two ways of opening and closing.

Safety anti-pinch

In automatic mode and at the end of its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle while closing it stops and moves back slightly.

Manual mode

) Pull or press control A gently, without going past the point of resistance.

The blind stops when you release the control.

If the blind meets an obstacle during operation, you must reverse the movement of the blind. To do this, press the control concerned.

When the driver operates the blind control, he must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the blind.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly.

Be aware of children when operating the blind.

107

108

BOOT FITTINGS


1.

Load space cover

2.

Hooks

3.

12 V accessory socket (120 W)

4.

Torch

5.

Concertina boards

6.

Stowing rings on the fl oor

7.

Cup holder

8.

Storage compartments or audio ampli er

9.

Storage compartment under the oor

BOOT FITTINGS


1.

Load space cover

2.

Hooks

3.

12 V accessory socket (120 W)

4.

Torch

5.

Concertina boards

6.

Stowing rings on the fl oor

7.

Cup holder

8.

Armrests

9.

Storage compartments or audio ampli fi er

10.

3 rd row seat belt buckles

109

110

Roller load space cover

To remove the load space cover:

) remove the load space cover guides from the rails on the boot pillars,

) reel in the load space cover in its roller,

) pivot the ends of the roller upwards to release it,

) remove the roller from its support.

To store the load space cover, roller uppermost and fl ap facing towards the inside of the vehicle:

) place the right-hand end in its housing,

) slide the left-hand end into the guide then into its housing,

) secure the assembly by pivoting the ends downwards.

To install the load space cover:

) position one of the ends of the roller in its support,

) insert the second end in its support,

) pivot the ends of the roller downwards to secure it,

) reel out the load space cover to the boot pillars,

) insert the load space screen guides in the rails on the boot pillars.

If you use the 3 row seats

(7 seat version), it is essential to store the roller in its housing.

The roller has two rings for fi net depending on its location.

High load retaining net *

Hooked onto the special upper and lower fi xings, this permits use of the entire loading volume up to the roof:

- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded.

- behind the rear seats (row 2).

When positioning the net, check that the strap loops are visible from the boot; this will make slackening or tightening easier.

To use it in row 1:

) fold the rear seats,

) open the covers of the upper fi xings 1 ,

) unroll the high load retaining net,

) position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding upper fi xing 1 , then do the same with the other end,

) slacken the straps fully,

) fi x the snap hook of each of the straps on the corresponding Top

Tether ring 3 (located on the back of the folded rear side seats),

) tighten the straps,

) check that the net is hooked and tightened correctly.

To use it in row 2:

) roll up or remove the load space screen,

) open the covers of the upper fi xings 2 ,

) unroll the high load retaining net,

) position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding upper fi xing 2 , then do the same with the other end,

) fi x the snap hook of each of the straps in the corresponding stowing ring 4 ,

) tighten the straps,

) check that the net is hooked and tightened correctly.

* If your vehicle is equipped with this.

111

Luggage retaining net

Hooked onto the stowing rings on the fl oor and/or on the load space cover roller, the luggage retaining net available as an accessory enables you to secure your luggage.

There are 4 possible positions:

- fl at at the bottom of the boot, - vertical at the back of the rear seats,

- horizontal, level with the load space cover,

- fl at at the bottom of the boot and vertical at the back of the rear seats.

Hooks 12 V accessory socket Storage box (5 seat version)

The hooks permit the securing of shopping bags.

) To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: 120 W), remove the cap and connect an appropriate adaptor.

) Turn the key to the ignition on position.

) Raise the concertina board to gain access to the storage box.

Depending on the con fi guration, this has areas for storing:

- a box of spare bulbs,

- a tyre repair kit,

- two warning triangles,

- ...

113

Torch

This is a removable lamp, fi tted in the boot wall, which can be used to illuminate the boot or as a torch.

For the boot lighting function, refer to the "Visibility" section.

Rear side blinds

Fitted on the rear windows, these protect your young children from the sun.

2 nd row

114

Use

) Extract the torch from its location pulling the side of the torch A .

) Press the switch, located on the back, to switch the torch on or off.

) Unfold the support, located on the back, to set down and raise the torch; for example, when changing a wheel.

Operation

This torch operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately

45 minutes and charges while you are driving.

Storing

) Put the torch back in place in its location starting with the narrow part B .

If you have forgotten to switch off the torch, this switches it off automatically.

3 rd row (7 seat version)

Observe the polarities when fi tting the batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with normal single-use batteries.

It the torch is not engaged correctly, it may not charge and may not come on when the boot is opened.

) Pull the blind by the central tab.

) Position the blind attachment on the hook.

CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

TO CHILD SEATS

Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations:

- in accordance with European regulations, age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight , on seats fi tted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,

- statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats,

- a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the "rearwards-

facing" position both in the front and in the rear.

"Rearwards-facing"

When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat , it is essential that the passenger airbag is deactivated. Otherwise, would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to in fl .

"Forwards-facing"

When a "forwards-facing" child seat is installed on the , adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully back and highest position with the seat back upright and leave the passenger's airbag activated.

PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel in the outer rear seats of your vehicle:

- "rearwards-facing" up to the age of 2,

- "forwards-facing" over the age of 2.

* The rules for carrying children are speci fi c to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned.

115

116

Passenger seat in the fully back and highest position.

Passenger airbag OFF

For more information on deactivating the airbag, refer to the "Safety" section then

"Airbags".

Label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor

AR

BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА . Това можеда причини СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето .

CS NIKDY neumis ť ujte d ě tské zádržné za ř ízení orientované sm ě rem dozadu na sedadlo chrán ě né AKTIVOVANÝM č elním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpe č í SMRTI DÍT Ě TE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRAN Ě NÍ.

DA Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.

DE Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE

VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.

EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου , σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ

αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ . Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ

EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur

ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN ASIENTO

PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE O HERIRLO

GRAVEMENTE.

ET Ärge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas sõiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib põhjustada lapsele RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.

FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.

FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal

ACTIVÉ.

Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT

HR NIKADA ne postavljati dje č ju sjedalicu le đ ima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zašti ć eno UKLJU Č ENIM prednjim ZRA Č NIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.

117

118

HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL van védve. Ez a gyermek halálát vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.

IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO.

Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.

LT NIEKADA ne į renkite vaiko prilaikymo priemon ė s su atgal atgr ę žtu vaiku ant s ė dyn ė s, kuri saugoma VEIKIAN Č IOS priekin ė s ORO PAGALV Ė S.

Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali b ū ti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.

LV NAV PIE Ļ AUJAMS uzst ā d ī t uz aizmuguri v ē rstu b ē rnu s ē dekl ī ti priekš ē j ā pasažiera viet ā , kur ā ir AKTIVIZ Ē TS priekš ē jais DROŠ Ī BAS GAISA

SPILVENS.

Tas var izrais ī t B Ē RNA N Ā VI vai rad ī t NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.

MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/ti fl a marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/ti fl a

NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.

NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.

PL NIGDY nie instalowa ć fotelika dzieci ę cego w pozycji «ty ł em do kierunku jazdy»na siedzeniu wyposa ż onym w CZO Ł OW Ą PODUSZK Ę

POWIETRZN Ą w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko nara ż one b ę dzie na Ś MIER Ć lub BARDZO POWA Ż NE OBRA Ż ENIA CIA Ł A w momenicie wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej

PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.

RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal

ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.

RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье , защищенном

ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ , установленной перед этим сиденьем .

Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ

SK NIKDY nepoužívajte na prednom sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM detské zadržiavacie zariadenie umiestnené v proti smere jazdy.

Môže to spôsobi ť SMR Ť , alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIE Ť A Ť A.

SL NIKOLI ne nameš č ajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, č e je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem AKTIVIRANA.

Takšna namestitev lahko povzro č i SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.

SR NIKADA ne koristite de č je sedište koje se okre ć e unazad na sedištu zašti ć enim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.

SV Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA skador på barnet.

TR KES İ NLKLE HAVA YASTI Ğ I AKT İ F olan ön koltu ğ a yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltu ğ u yerle ş tirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCU Ğ UN ÖLMES İ NE veya ÇOK

A Ğ IR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.

CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a .

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

L1

"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus".

Installed in the rearwards-facing position.

L2

"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L5

"KLIPPAN Optima".

From the age of 6 years (approximately 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.

L6

"RÖMER KIDFIX" .

Can be secured using the vehicle's

ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.

119

INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT WITH A STAY

Care must be taken when installing a child seat with stay (a drop down leg) in the vehicle. In particular you should look for the presence of a storage compartment below the rear seat footwells.

120

Do not place the stay on the storage compartment cover; it might break in a serious impact. Where the adjustments of the stay allow it, we suggest two other possibilities for installation.

The centre rear seat does not have a storage compartment below the footwell. You can therefore easily fi t a child seat with a stay, whether

Iso fi x or universal (installed using the

3 point seat belt).

At the bottom of the storage compartment

If the stay is long enough, you can adjust it so that it contact the bottom of the storage compartment. Remove all objects from the storage compartment before installing the stay.

Away from the storage compartment area

Another possibility, if the stay is long enough and can be inclined suf fi ciently

(always by following the recommendations given the installation instructions for the child seat), is to position the stay so that it contacts the fl oor away from the storage compartment. Adjust the longitudinal position of the front or rear seat to obtain a satisfactory position for the stay away from the storage compartment.

If you cannot fi t the stay in way described, we recommend that you do not fi t a child seat with stay to this seat.

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS USING THE SEAT BELT

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a) in accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Seat

Weight of the child and indicative age

Under 13 kg

(groups 0 ( b ) and 0+)

Up to approx 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg

(group 1)

1 to 3 years approx

From 15 to 25 kg

(group 2)

3 to 6 years approx


(group 3)

6 to 10 years approx

U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)

Front passenger seat ( c ) with height adjuster

Front passenger seat (c) without height adjuster

5 seats (2 rows)

X X X X

Outer rear seats

Centre rear seat

U

U

* U

U

* U

U

* U

U

*

To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards suf fi ciently so that front seat backrest is not in the way.

* Precautions are required when fi tting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the section "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

121

122

Seat

Front passenger seat (c) with height adjuster

Front passenger seat (c) without height adjuster

7 seats (3 rows)

Outer rear seats

2nd row

Centre rear seat

2nd row

Rear seats 3rd row

Weight of the child and indicative age

Under 13 kg

(groups 0 (b) and 0+)

Up to approx 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg

(group 1)

1 to 3 years approx


(group 2)

3 to 6 years approx


(group 3)

6 to 10 years approx

U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)

X X X

U *

U

U

U

U

U

* U

U

U

*

X

U *

U

U a: universal child seat, child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using a seat belt. b: group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shells seats and baby carriers cannot be installed in the front passenger seat. c: consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.

U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, "rearwards-facing" and/or "forwards-facing".

U (R): idem U , with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position.

L-: only the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned (according to country).

X: seat position not suitable for installation of a child seat for the weight class indicated.

* Precautions are required when fi tting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the section "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

ADVICE ON CHILD

SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack relative to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys.

When installing a child seat using the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat fi rmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.

For optimum installation of the "forwards-facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is in contact with the back of the vehicle's seat and that the head restraint does not cause any discomfort.

If the head restraint has to be removed, ensure that it is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.

Children under the age of 10 must not travel in the "forwards-facing" position on the front passenger seat, unless the rear seats are already occupied by other children, cannot be used or are absent.

Deactivate the passenger airbag when a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to in fl ate.

To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.

To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the rear windows.

Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.

PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fi tted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

- a child or children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,

- a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,

- the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

123

"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS

Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation s .

The seats, represented below, are fi tted with regulation ISOFIX mountings.

There are three rings for each seat.

- Two rings , located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label.

This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fi tting of the child seat in your vehicle.

- A ring B as the

, behind the seat, referred to upper strap.

for fi xing the

The are fi tted with two latches which are easily secured on

A .

Some also have an which is attached to ring .

5 seats

To attach this strap, raise the vehicle seat's head restraint then pass the hook between its rods. Then fi x the hook on ring B and tighten the upper strap.

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

For information regarding the ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, refer to the table showing the locations for installing ISOFIX child seats.

124

7 seats

ISOFIX CHILD SEAT

Recommended by PEUGEOT and approved for your vehicle

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX

(size category B1 )

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed only in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B , referred to as the TOP TETHER.

Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.

Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the back of the seat.

Can be installed forwards-facing by attaching it to the seat using a three-point seat belt.

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fi tted with ISOFIX mountings.

In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fi the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

125

SEATING POSITIONS FOR INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fi tted with ISOFIX mountings.

In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter between A and G , is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Type of ISOFIX child seat

ISOFIX size category

Less than

10 kg

(group 0)

Up to approx.

6 months

Shell

F G

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Less than 13 kg

(group 0+)

Up to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

From approx. 1 to 3 years

"rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"

C D E C D A B B1

Front passenger seat X X X X

126

5 seats (2 rows)

Outer rear seats

Centre rear seat

IL-SU

X

* IL-SU

IL-SU

* IL-SU

IL-SU

*

IUF *

IL-SU *

IUF

IL-SU

* Precautions are required when fi tting a child seat with a (or drop down leg). Refer to the sction on "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards suf fi ciently so that front seat backrest is not in the way.

./..

Type of ISOFIX child seat

ISOFIX size category

Front passenger seat

Less than

10 kg

(group 0)

Up to approx.

6 months

Shell

F G

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Less than 13 kg

(group 0+)

Up to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

From approx. 1 to 3 years

"rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"

C D E C D A B B1

X X X X

7 seats (3 rows)

Outer rear seats

2nd row

Centre rear seat

2nd row

IL-SU

X

* IL-SU

IL-SU

* IL-SU

IL-SU

*

IUF *

IL-SU *

IUF

IL-SU

Rear seats 3rd row Not Iso fi x

* Precautions are required when fi tting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the section on "Installing a child seat with a stay" for more information.

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an so fi x U niversal seat, " F orwards-facing" secured using the top belt.

IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an I so fi x S emi- U niversal seat either:

- a shell seat fi tted with an upper strap or a stay.

For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to the section on "Iso fi x mountings".

X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or shell for the weight group indicated.

127

128

MANUAL CHILD LOCK

Mechanical system to prevent opening of the rear door using its interior control.

The control is located on the edge of each rear door.

ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK

Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of the rear electric windows.

Switching off

) With the ignition on, press this button again.

The indicator lamp in the button goes off, accompanied by a message to confi rm that the child lock is off.

This indicator lamp remains off while the child lock is switched off.

Locking Switching on

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock.


) Turn the red control one eighth of a turn using the ignition key as shown in the label on the door. Check that the lock is on .

Unlocking

) Turn the red control one eighth of a turn using the ignition key.

) With the ignition on, press this button.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message to confi rm that the child lock is on.

This indicator lamp remains on until the child lock is switched off.

It is still possible to open the doors from the outside and operate the rear electric windows from the driver's control panel.

This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control.

Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition.

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.

DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LAMPS

A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

HORN

Audible warning to alert other road users to an imminent danger.

) Lower the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the left.

) Raise the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the right.

If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than twenty seconds, the volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 40 mph (60 km/h).

) Tilt or press button , the direction indicators fl ash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps

"Motorway" function

Move the stalk brie fl y upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will fl ash 3 times.

When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically.

They switch off automatically the fi rst time you accelerate.

) You can also switch them off by pressing the button.

) Press one of the spokes of the steering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and only in the following cases:

- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,

- when approaching an area where there is no visibility.

129

130

TYRE UNDER-INFLATION

DETECTION

System which automatically checks the pressure of the tyres while driving.

Puncture

The warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen identifying the wheel concerned.

) Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, avoiding any sudden movement of the steering wheel and the brakes.

) Change the damaged wheel (punctured or very de fl ated tyre), and have the tyre pressure checked as soon as possible.

All repairs and changing of tyres on a wheel fi tted with this system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If, when changing a tyre, you install a wheel which is not detected by your vehicle (example: fi tting of snow tyres), you must have the system reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Sensors fi tted in each valve trigger a warning in the event of malfunction

(speed above 12 mph (20 km/h)).

The spare wheel is not fi tted with a sensor.

Sensor(s) not detected or faulty

A message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal, to identify the wheel or wheels which are not detected or to indicate a fault in the system.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi sensor(s).

The tyre under-in fl ation detection system is an aid to driving which does not replace the need for the driver to be vigilant or to drive responsibly.

Under-in fl

This warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal, to identify the wheel concerned.

) Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

This check must be carried out when the tyres are cold.

This message is also displayed when one of the wheels is away from the vehicle (being repaired) or when one or more wheels without a sensor are fi tted.

This system does not avoid the need to have the tyre pressures checked regularly (refer to the

"Identi fi cation markings" section) to ensure that the optimum dynamic performance of the vehicle is maintained and prevent premature wear of the tyres, particularly in arduous driving conditions

(heavy load, high speed).

The tyre pressures must be checked cold, at least once a month. Remember to check the pressure of the spare wheel.

The tyre under-in fl ation detection system may experience temporary interference due to electromagnetic emissions on a frequency close to that used by the system.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY

PROGRAMME (ESC)

Electronic Stability Programme (ESC:

Electronic Stability Control) incorporating the following systems:

- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),

- the emergency braking assistance,

- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control,

- the dynamic stability control (DSC).

Definitions

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)

This system improves the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and provides improved control in corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces.

The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking.

The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.

Emergency braking assistance

In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance.

It is triggered in relation to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.

Anti-skid regulation (ASR)

The ASR system (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction in order to avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.

Operation

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution

(EBFD)

When this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the ABS, which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

Snow driving assistance

(Intelligent Traction Control)

Your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: Intelligent Traction Control.

This automatic system continuously checks for situations of dif fi cult surface adhesion that could make it dif fi cult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow.

In these situations, Intelligent Traction

Control limits the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control.

In extremely severe conditions (deep snow, mud…), it can be useful to tempodynamic stability control and wheel anti-slip systems to allow a degree of wheel spin and so recover grip.

It is recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.

Snow tyres are strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.

When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the

STOP warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

When changing wheels (tyres and rims), make sure that these are approved for your vehicle.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.

In emergency braking, press very fi the pressure.

131

132

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, this indicates a malfunction of the system.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi checked.

) Press the button.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

This warning lamp and the indicator lamp in the button come on: the DSC system no longer acts on the operation of the internal combustion engine.

Activation

This system is activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.

It comes into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.

Reactivation

The system is reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).

This is indicated by fl ashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.

The correct functioning of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the PEUGEOT assembly and operation procedures.

After an impact, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Deactivation

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip.

) Press the button again to reactivate it manually.

SEAT BELTS

Fastening Height adjustment

) Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.

) Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

) To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the control until you fi nd a notch.

A and slide it

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fi tted with a pretensioning and force limiting system.

This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact.

Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants.

The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.

The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.

Unfastening

) Press the red button on the buckle.

) Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

Front seat belt not fastened/ unfastened warning lamp

When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display, if the driver and/or the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning lamp fl ashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.

133

134

Seat belt not fastened/unfastened warning lamps display

Rear seat belts

The rear seats are each fi tted with a three-point inertia reel seat belt with force limiter (with the exception of the centre rear seat).

Seat belt unfastened warning lamps display

Fastening

) Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.

) Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

1.

Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/unfastened warning lamp.

2.

Front left seat belt warning lamp.

3.

Front right seat belt warning lamp.

4.


5.

Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.

6.


The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.

7 seat version

7.

3 rd row rear left seat belt warning lamp

8.

3 rd row rear right seat belt warning lamp.

Unfastening

) Press the red button on the buckle.

) Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

Seat belt unfastened warning lamp

This warning lamp comes on on the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display, when one or more rear passengers unfasten their seat belt.

From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), this warning lamp fl ashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.

When the ignition is switched on, with the engine running or when the vehicle is moving at less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamps to come on in red for approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not fastened.

When the vehicle is moving at more than

12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamp , , 6 , 7 or comes on in red, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if a rear passenger has unfastened their seat belt.

To prevent movement of the rear side seat belts in the

2 nd row, slide the straps into the guides provided for this purpose.

row rear centre seat belt 3 row rear seat belts

(7 seat version)

The seat belt for the rear centre seat of the 2 row is incorporated at the rear right of the roof.

The seat belts for the rear seats of the

3 rd row are incorporated at the corner of the corresponding boot pillar and of the roof.

Installation

) Pull the strap and insert the tongue in the right-hand buckle.

) Insert the tongue in the left-hand buckle.

) Check the fastening of each buckle by pulling the strap.

Installation

) Pull the strap and insert the tongue in the buckle, on the boot side trim side.

) Insert the tongue in the opposite buckle.

) Check the fastening of each buckle by pulling the strap.

Removal and storing

) Press the red button on the buckle , then on the buckle A .

) Guide the strap as it reels in and bring the tongue B , then A onto the magnet of the attachment point on the roof.

Removal and storing

) Press the red button on the buckle , then on the buckle C .

) Guide the strap as it reels in and the tongues D and C .

135

136 correctly and that they are all restrained securely before setting off.

The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts

Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.

Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not ful fi l their role fully.

The seat belts are fi tted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size.

The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use.

Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly.

The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.

The inertia reels are fi tted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling fi rmly on the strap and releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must:

- be tightened as close to the body as possible,

- be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,

- be used to restrain only one person,

- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,

- not be converted or modi fi ed to avoid affecting its performance.

In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a quali fi ed workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.

Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage.

Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT dealers.

After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres.

Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact , the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on.

Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

AIRBAGS

Impact detection zones

System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the force-limiting seat belts (with the exception of the rear centre passenger).

If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags de fl ate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,

- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only deploy once.

If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.

A.

Front impact zone.

B.

Side impact zone.

Deployment of the airbag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.

The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

Front airbags

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax.

The driver's airbag is fi tted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fi tted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deployment

The airbags are deployed simultaneously, unless the passenger's front airbag is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A , in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.

The front airbag in fl ates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.

137

138

Deactivation

Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated.

) With the ignition off , insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch.

) Turn it to the "OFF" position.

) Then, remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated when you install a "rear facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Operating fault

If these warning lamps come on or fl ash, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop to have the system checked.

The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

Reactivation

When you remove the child seat, turn the switch to the position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.

If even one of the two airbag warning lamps comes on continuously, do not install a child seat on the front passenger seat.

Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

With the ignition on, this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display for approximately one minute, if the passenger's front airbag is activated.

According to version, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and/or in the seat belt and passenger's front airbag warning lamps display when the ignition is on and until the airbag is reactivated.

Lateral airbags

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.

Each lateral airbag is fi tted in the front, in the outer side of the seat back frame.

The lateral airbag in fl ates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door panel.

Impact detection zones

Deployment

The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The curtain airbag in fl ates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

A.

Front impact zone.

B.

Side impact zone.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop to have the system checked.

The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

Deployment

The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

Curtain airbags

System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head.

Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed.

In the event of a rear or front collision, the airbag is not deployed.

139

140

For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the airbags or injure the occupants.

After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked.

All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag in fl ates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then de fl ates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

Front airbags

Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.

If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.

Lateral airbags

Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer.

Refer to the "Accessories" section.

Do not fi x or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.

Curtain airbags

Do not fi x or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed.

If fi tted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

Programming the mode

Depending on the country of registration of the vehicle, the automatic application when the engine is switched off and the automatic release when you press the accelerator can be deactivated.

Activation/deactivation of this function is possible by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The electric parking brake combines

2 operational modes:

- Automatic application/release

Application is automatic when the engine stops, release is automatic on use of the accelerator (activated by default),

- Manual application/release

The parking brake can be applied/ released manually by pulling control lever A .

The parking brake is then applied and released manually. When the driver's door is opened, there is an audible signal and a message is displayed if the brake is not applied.

Deactivation is recommended in particularly cold conditions

(ice) and during towing (breakdown, caravan...). Refer to the

"Manual release" paragraph.

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, the automatic mode is deactivated.

Do not place any object (packet of cigarettes, telephone, ...) behind the electric brake control.

141

142

With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off,

Application of the parking brake is confi rmed by: pull on the control lever A .

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever ,

- display of the message

"Handbrake on".

When the driver’s door is opened with the engine running, a beep is heard and a message is displayed if the parking brake has not been applied, unless the selector lever is in position (Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.

With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake, press on the pedal or the accelerator, the control lever A .

Full application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by: mum application of the parking brake.

It is obtained by means of a on the control lever A , until you see the message "Handbrake on" and a beep is heard. maxi-

- the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the the control lever going off,


"Handbrake off".

Maximum application is essential:

- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan or a trailer, if the automatic functions are activated but you are applying the parking brake manually,

- when the gradient you are parked on is variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry, during towing).

If you pull the control lever without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and a warning lamp will come on in the instrument panel.

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, make a maximum application of the parking brake then turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

After a maximum application, the release time will be longer.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on, not fl ashing.

Automatic application, engine off

Automatic release

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake the engine is switched off.

The application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever A ,

The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively you press the accelerator:

when

) Manual gearbox: press down fully on the clutch pedal, engage fi rst gear or reverse, press on the accelerator pedal and move off.

) Electronic gear control gearbox select position A , M or R

:

then press on the accelerator pedal.


"Handbrake on".

) Automatic gearbox: select position D , M or then press on the accelerator pedal.

engine running

With the engine running and the vehicle stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle it is essential to apply the parking brake by pulling on control lever A .

The application of the parking brake is con fi rmed by:

- illumination of the braking warning lamp and the warning lamp in the control lever A ,


"Handbrake on".

An audible signal will con fi rm to you the application/release of your electric parking brake.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on (not fl ashing).

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

Full release of the parking brake is confi rmed by:

When the driver’s door is opened, an audible signal heard and a message is displayed if the parking brake has not been applied, unless the selector lever is in position (Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.

- the braking warning lamp and of the warning lamp P in the control lever A going off,


"Handbrake off".

Label on the door panel

In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.

When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, as you may release the parking brake.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake warning lamp in the instrument panel is on, not fl ashing.

143

144

Particular situations

In certain situations (e.g. starting the engine), the parking brake can automatically alter its force. This is normal operation.

To advance your vehicle a few centimetres without starting the engine, but with the ignition on, press on the brake pedal and release the parking brake by pulling then control lever . The full release of the parking brake is con fi rmed by the warning lamp in the control lever and the warning lamp in the instrument panel going off and the display of the message "Handbrake off". while applied or if the battery runs fl at, an emergency release is always possible.

EMERGENCY BRAKING

In the event of a failure of the main service brake or in an exceptional situation

(e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, a continuous pull on the control lever A will stop the vehicle .

The dynamic stability control (DSC) provides stability during emergency braking.

If there is a fault with the emergency braking, one of the following messages will be displayed:

- "Parking brake faulty".

- "Parking brake control faulty".

If a failure of the DSC system is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp, then braking stability is not guaranteed.

In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull release" actions on control lever A .

The emergency braking must only be used in exceptional circumstances.

Emergency release

Front left seat moved back fully.

In the event of the electric parking brake malfunctioning or the battery running fl at, an emergency manual device can release the parking brake.

) Immobilise the vehicle (or keep it stationary, if the brake pedal is pressed), with the engine running, by engaging fi rst gear (manual gearbox), position P (automatic gearbox)

M or (6-speed electronic gear control gearbox).

) Switch off the engine but leave the ignition on. If it is impossible to immobilise the vehicle, do not operate the control and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop urgently.

) Fetch the two vehicle blocks and the release device, located under the boot carpet (see "Changing a wheel" in the "Practical information" section).

) Immobilise the vehicle by placing blocks in front and behind one of the front wheels.

) Slide the front left-hand seat back as far as possible.

) Lift up the fl oor plug B in the carpet under the seat.

) Pierce the protective cover C on the tube D with the release device.

) Place the release device in the tube D .

) Turn the release device

For safety reasons , it is to continue turning the device as far as it will go. The parking brake is released.

) Remove the release device and store it with the blocks in the toolbox.

The operation of the parking brake reinitialises when the ignition is switched off then on again. If the reinitialisation of the parking brake proves impossible, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

The subsequent time required for application may be longer than during normal operation.

, or stopping or starting the engine while the release device is engaged.

Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the protective cover.

For safety reasons, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible to replace the protective cover.

Following an emergency unlocking, immobilisation of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed once the manual emergency release has been deployed and the manual control does not allow the re-application of your parking brake.

Take no action, either on the control lever

145

146

HILL START ASSIST

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately

2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This system only operates when:

- the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,

- in particular conditions on a slope,

- with the driver’s door closed.

The hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.

Operation

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily when you release the brake pedal:

- provided you are in fi rst gear or neutral on a manual gearbox,

- provided you are in position A or M on an electronic gear control gearbox,

- provided you are in position or M on an automatic gearbox.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.

Do not exit the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase.

If you need to exit the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp (and the warning lamp P in the lever of the electric parking brake) are on fi xed

(not fl ashing).

If a fault in the system occurs, these warning lamps come on. Contact a

PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop sto have the system checked.

Operating faults

If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

Situations Consequences

Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:

- The automatic functions are deactivated.

- Hill start assist is not available.

- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.

Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:

- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal and releasing the control.


- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.

Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:

- The automatic functions are deactivated.


and possibly fl ashing

To apply the electric parking brake:

) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.

) Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.

) Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake warning lamps.

The application is slower than during normal operation.

To release the electric parking brake:

) Switch on the ignition.

) Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.

If the braking warning lamp is fl ashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

147

148

Situations

Parking brake control fault - auto parking brake activated " and of the following warning lamps:

and possibly

Consequences

- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration functions are available.

- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are not available. fl ashing

Battery fault

- If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as the traf fi c allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two chocks under the wheels).

- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY Buttons Displays during operation

System which projects various information onto a transparent strip in the fi eld of vision of the driver so that they do not have to take their eyes off the road.

This system operates when the engine is running and the settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.

1.

Head-up display on/off.

2.

Brightness adjustment.

3.

Display height adjustment.

The strip is activated by pressing one of the buttons.

Once the system has been activated, the following information is grouped together in the head-up display:

A.

The speed of your vehicle.

B.

Cruise control/speed limiter information.

C.

"Distance alert" information (depending on version).

149

Activation/Deactivation Brightness adjustment

We recommend that adjustments are only made using these buttons when the vehicle is stationary.

When stationary or while driving, no objects should be placed around the transparent strip (or on its cover) to avoid blocking the strip output and preventing its correct operation.

150

) With the engine running, press button 1 .

The activated/deactivated status when the engine was switched off is retained when the engine is switched on again.

) With the engine running, adjust the brightness of the information using button 2 :

- up to increase the brightness,

- down to decrease the brightness.

Height adjustment

) With the engine running, adjust the display to the required height using button 3 :

- up to move the display up,

- down to move the display down.

In certain extreme weather conditions (rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, ...) the headup display may not be legible or may suffer temporary interference.

Certain glasses (sunglasses, spectacles or polarised lenses) may hamper reading of the information.

To clean the transparent strip, which is made of organic glass, use a clean, soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or micro fi bre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent products as these could scratch the strip or damage the anti-re fl ection coating.

DISTANCE ALERT *

Driving aid which informs the driver of the time interval (in seconds) separating them from the vehicle in front when the driving conditions are stable.

It does not detect stationary vehicles any action on your vehicle's controls.

Buttons Displays during operation

For the safety time to be observed, refer to the current legislation or highway code recommendations in your country.

The system operates when the speed of your vehicle is higher than 45 mph

(70 km/h) and below 90 mph (150 km/h).

It has a programmable visual alert which remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

This system is a driving aid and cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

1.

On/off.

2.

Alert value increase (+)/decrease (-).

The information is grouped together in the head-up display.

Once the system has been activated:

A.

The speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range.

B.

Your vehicle is within the operating range but no vehicle has been detected.

C.

The vehicle in front of you has been detected.

The current time separating you from this vehicle is displayed permanently.

D.

The time between your vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the programmed alert value (it fl ashes).

* Depending on version.

151

152

Activation

) Press button , the indicator lamp comes on.

The system is activated but will only operate from 45 mph (70 km/h).

Programming the alert value

) Select the alert value required using button 2 , in steps of 0.1 second:

- up to increase: "+",

- down to decrease: "-".

Example with a value of 2 seconds:

Operating limits

The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front correctly (very diffi cult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...). A message is displayed in the multifunction screen.

The vehicle being followed may not be detected in certain conditions such as, for example:

When the time (in seconds) between your vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the programmed time (alert value), a visual alert fl ashes.

A safety time of 2 seconds is recommended in normal driving conditions (correct traction and speed) to avoid a collision in the event of emergency braking.

- when changing lane,

- when the vehicle in front is either too far ahead (maximum range of the sensor: 100 m) or stationary (in a traf fi c jam, ...),

When the vehicle being followed is much too near (time between the two vehicles less than 0.5 seconds), the display remains fi xed at 0.5 seconds.

Deactivation

) Press button 1 to deactivate the system, the indicator lamp goes off.

If the indicator lamp in button fl ashes, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

The alert value can be programmed to between 0.9 second and 2.5 seconds.

The visual alert can be deactivated by programming a value of 0 second.

Reactivation

) Press button again to reactivate the system.

The last value programmed is retained and the indicator lamp comes on.

This system is not an anti-collision radar and it does not act of the movement of your vehicle. It provides information but cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

SPEED LIMITER

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

When the programmed speed limit is reached, pressing the accelerator pedal no longer has any effect unless it is pressed fi rmly, which permits temporary exceeding of the programmed speed.

To return to the programmed speed, simply slow down to a speed below the programmed speed by releasing the accelerator.

Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel

The speed limiter is manually: it requires a programmed speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h).

The speed limiter is by manual operation of the control.

The controls of this system are grouped together on stalk A .

1.

Speed limiter mode selection dial

2.

Programmed value decrease button

3.

Programmed value increase button

4.

Speed limiter on / off button

The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

The programmed information is grouped together on the instrument panel screen.

5.

Speed limiter on / off indication

6.

Speed limiter mode selection indication

7.

Programmed speed value

The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

This information also appears in the head-up display.

For more information, refer to the

"Head-up display" section.

153

154

Programming

) Turn dial to the position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (OFF/

Pause).

You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed.

) Set the speed value by pressing button 3 (e.g.:

55 mph (90 km/h)).

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3 :

- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,

- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,

- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

) Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4 .

) Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button : the display con fi rms that it has been switched off (OFF/Pause).

) Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button again.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed speed will not have any effect unless you press the pedal fi past the point of resistance .

The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the programmed speed, which is still displayed, fl ashes.

Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the fl ashing of the programmed speed.

Return to normal driving

) Turn dial to the position: the speed limiter mode is deselected.

The display returns to the distance recorder.

Operating fault

In the event of a speed limiter malfunction, the speed is cleared resulting in fl ashing of the dashes.


On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.


- ensure that the mat is positioned correctly, not other.

CRUISE CONTROL Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel

System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) and the engagement of:

- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,

- second gear in sequential mode on the electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox,

- position on the electronic gear control gearbox or on the automatic gearbox.

The cruise control is switched off manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESP system for safety reasons.

The controls of this system are grouped together on stalk A .

1.

Cruise control mode selection dial

2.

Speed programming / programmed value decrease button

3.

Speed programming / programmed value increase button

4.

Cruise control off / resume button

It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal.

The programmed information is grouped together in the instrument panel screen.

5.

Cruise control off / resume indication

6.

Cruise control mode selection indication

7.

Programmed speed value

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value. The cruise control cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

This information also appears in the head-up display.

For more information, refer to the

"Head-up display" section.

155

156

) Turn dial to the position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on

(OFF/Pause).

) Set the programmed speed by accelerating to the required speed, then press button

70 mph (110 km/h)).

3 (e.g.:

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3 :

- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,

- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,

- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.

) Switch off the cruise control by pressing button 4 : the display con fi rms that it has been switched off (OFF/Pause).

) Switch the cruise control back on by pressing button again.

Exceeding the programmed speed

Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed speed results in fl ashing of this speed in the screen.

Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the fl ashing of the speed.

Return to normal driving

) Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is deselected. The display returns to the distance recorder.

Operating fault

In the event of a cruise control malfunction, the speed is cleared resulting in fl ashing of the dashes.


When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traf fi c.

On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.


- ensure that the mat is positioned correctly,

6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX gear

) Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5 th or 6 th gear.

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR *

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up.

Example:

- You are in third gear.

Engaging reverse gear

) Raise the ring under the knob and move the gear lever to the left then forwards.

Operation

The system intervenes only when driving economically.

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears.

The gear recommended should not be considered compulsory. In fact, the con fi guration of the road, the amount of traf fi c and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear.

Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system.

This function cannot be deactivated.

- You press the accelerator pedal moderately.

- The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear, if appropriate.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

In the case of driving which makes particular demands on

( fi the performance of the engine rm pressure on the accelerator pedal, for example, when overtaking...), the system will not recommend a gear change.

The system never suggests:

The information appears in the form of an arrow in the instrument panel screen.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, this arrow may be accompanied by the recommended gear.

- engaging reverse gear,

- engaging a lower gear. * According to engine.

157

158

6-SPEED ELECTRONIC

GEAR CONTROL GEARBOX

Gear lever Steering mounted controls

Six-speed electronic gear control gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.

Three driving modes are offered:

- automatic mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox,

- sequential mode for manual changing of the gears by the driver,

- auto sequential mode to overtake, for example, remaining in automatic mode while using the functions of the sequential mode.

A function is available in automatic or sequential mode for a more dynamic style of driving.

R.

Reverse

) With your foot on the brake, move the lever upwards to select this position.

N.

Neutral.

) With your foot on the brake, select this position to start.

A.

Automatic mode.

) Move the lever downwards to select this mode.

M. + / Sequential mode with manual changing of the gears.

) Move the lever downwards then to the left to select this mode, then:

- push the lever forwards to change up a gear,

- or pull the lever rearwards to change down a gear.

S.

Sport setting.

) Press this button to activate or deactivate this function.

+.

Change up paddle to the right of the steering wheel.

) Press the back of the steering mounted paddle to change up a gear.

-.

Change down paddle to the left of the steering wheel.

) Press the back of the steering mounted paddle to change down a gear.

The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or engage or disengage reverse gear.

Displays in the instrument panel

)

)

)

Select position N .

Press the brake pedal down fully.

Start the engine.

N appears in the instrument panel screen.

If position , or is selected, even with the engine at idle, if the brakes are released the vehicle moves without any action on the accelerator. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle when the engine is running. When carrying out maintenance on the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position N .

Gear lever positions

N.

Neutral

R.

Reverse

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Gears in sequential mode

AUTO.

This comes on when the automatic mode is selected. It goes off on changing to sequential mode.

S.

Sport (Sport setting)

N fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if the gear lever is not in position N on starting.

Foot on brake fl ashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, if the brake pedal is not pressed on starting.

Sequential mode

) When the vehicle has moved off, select position M to change to sequential mode.

AUTO disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel screen.

) Place your brake when this warning lamp fl ashes (e.g.: when starting the engine).

) Keep your foot on the brake pedal, move the gear lever to position A or

M to go forwards, or to go backwards.

) Take your foot off the brake pedal, you can then move off.

) The parking brake is released automatically, otherwise release it manually.

There is an audible signal when reverse gear is engaged.

AUTO and or appear in the instrument panel screen.

The gear change requests are only carried out if the engine speed permits.

It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.

When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow vehicle to pull away in the correct gear.

159

160

At very low speed, if reverse gear is requested, this will only be taken into account when the vehicle is immobilised. The Foot on brake warning lamp may fl ash in the instrument panel to prompt you to brake.

At high speed, if reverse gear is requested, the indicator lamp will fl ash and the gearbox will change to neutral automatically. To engage a gear again, return the lever to position A or M .

On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the gear lever or the steering mounted paddles.

Never select neutral N while the vehicle is moving.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is immobilised with the brake pedal pressed.

Automatic mode "Auto sequential mode"

) Following use of the sequential

A to return to the automatic mode.

AUTO and the gear engaged appear in the instrument panel screen.

The gearbox is then operating in autoactive mode, without any action on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear in relation to the following parameters:

- style of driving,

- pro fi le of the road.

This mode enables you to overtake, for example, remaining in automatic mode while using the functions of the sequential mode.

) Operate the + or steering mounted paddle.

The gearbox engages the gear requested if the engine speed permits. AUTO is still displayed in the instrument panel.

After a few moments without any action on the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic control of the gears.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accelerator pedal fi rmly past the point of resistance.

Sport setting Stopping the vehicle Operating fault

) Following selection of the sequential mode or automatic mode, press button S to activate the Sport setting which offers you a more dynamic style of driving.

S appears next to the gear engaged in the instrument panel screen.

Before switching off the engine, you can choose to:

- move to position to engage neutral,

- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will not be possible to move the vehicle.

In both cases, it is essential that you apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

With the ignition on, if this warning lamp comes on and

AUTO fl ashes, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, this indicates a fault with the gearbox.


) Press button again to return to normal settings.

S is then cleared from the instrument panel screen.

The gearbox returns to normal mode automatically each time the ignition is switched off.

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, it is essential to place the gear lever in neutral N .

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, check that the gear lever is in neutral and that the parking brake is applied.

It is essential to press the brake pedal when starting the engine.

When parking, is it essential to apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, whatever the circumstances.

161

162

"PORSCHE TIPTRONIC

SYSTEM" AUTOMATIC

GEARBOX

Gear lever

Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing.

Four driving modes are offered:

- automatic operation for electronic management of the gears by the gearbox,

- sport programme for a more dynamic style of driving,

- snow programme to improve driving when traction is poor,

- manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.

Gear selection gate

1.

Gear lever.

2.

Button (sport) .

3.

Button " " (snow) .

P.

Park.

- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on or off.

- Starting the engine.

R.

Reverse.

- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, engine at idle.

N.

Neutral.

- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on.

- Starting the engine.

D.

Automatic operation.

M +/ . Manual operation with sequential changing of the six gears.

) Press forwards to change up through the gears.

or

) Press rearwards to change down through the gears.

Displays in the instrument panel

When you move the lever in the gate to select a position, the corresponding indicator is displayed in the instrument panel.

P.

Park

R.

Reverse

N.

Neutral

D.

Drive (Automatic driving)

S.

Sport programme

7 . Snow programme

1 to 6.

Gear engaged during manual operation

-.

Invalid value during manual operation

Moving off

) With your foot on the brake, select position P or N .

) Start the engine.

If this procedure is not followed, there is an audible signal, accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.

) With the engine running, press the brake pedal.

) Release the parking brake, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.

) Select position R , D or M ,

) Gradually release the brake pedal.

The vehicle moves off immediately.

If position is engaged inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then engage position D to accelerate.

) Select position for changing of the six gears.

Sport and snow programmes

These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very speci fi c conditions of use.

The gearbox then operates in autoadaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear according to the style of driving, the pro fi le of the road and the load in the vehicle.

For maximum acceleration without touching the lever, press the accelerator pedal down fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached.

On braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide ef fi cient engine braking.

If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear for safety reasons.

Sport programme "S"

) Press button , after starting the engine.

The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic style of driving.

S appears in the instrument panel.

Snow programme " 7 "

) Press button " ", after starting the engine.

The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads.

This programme improves starting and drive when traction is poor.

When the engine is running at idle, with the brakes released, if position , D or is selected, the vehicle moves even without the accelerator being pressed.

When the engine is running, never leave children in the vehicle without supervision.

When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P .

Never select position while the vehicle is moving.

Never select positions P or unless the vehicle is completely stationary.

7 appears in the instrument panel.

Return to automatic operation

) At any time, press the button selected again to quit the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.

163

164

Manual operation

) Select position for changing of the six gears.

) Push the lever towards the + sign to change up a gear.

) Pull the lever towards the sign to change down a gear.

Invalid value during manual operation

This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly

(selector between two positions).

It is only possible to change from one gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine speed permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate temporarily in automatic mode.

D disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel.

Stopping the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral.

In both cases, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.

Operating fault

When the ignition is on, the lighting of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen, indicates a gearbox malfunction.

In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear.

You may feel a substantial knock when changing from gearbox.

to and from N R .

This will not cause any damage to the

Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting.


This warning lamp may also come on if a door is opened.

If the engine speed is too low or too high, the gear selected fl ashes for a few seconds, then the actual gear engaged is displayed.

It is possible to change from position

(automatic) to position (manual) at any time.

When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically.

The sport and snow programmes do not operate in manual mode.

If the lever is not in position , when the driver's door is opened or approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, there is an audible signal and a message appears.

) Return the lever to position P ; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

You risk damaging the gearbox:

- if you press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time,

- if you force the lever from position to another position when the battery is fl at.

To reduce fuel consumption when stationary for long periods with the engine running (traf fi c jam...), position the gear lever at and apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed in automatic mode.

STOP & START

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traf fi c (red lights, traffi c jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Operation

Going into engine STOP mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby:

- with the electronic gearbox system , at speeds below 4 mph (6 km/h), press the brake pedal or put the gear lever in position N .

For your comfort, during parking maoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear.

STOP mode does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering...

Never refuel with the engine in

STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.

Special cases: STOP mode not available

STOP mode is not invoked when:

- the driver's door is open,

- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,

- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph

(10 km/h) since the last engine start using the key,

- the electric parking brake is applied or being applied,

- the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment,

- demisting is active,

- some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

If your vehicle is fi tted with the system, a time counter calculates the sum of the periods in STOP mode during a journey.

It rests itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

165

166

Going into engine START mode

The warning lamp goes off and the engine starts with the electronic gearbox system :

- gear lever in position A or M , release the brake pedal,

- or gear lever in position and the brake pedal released, move the gear lever to position A or M ,

- or engage reverse gear.

Special cases: START invoked automatically

Deactivation

START mode is invoked automatically when:

- the driver's door is open,

- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,

- the speed of the vehicle exceeds

7 mph (11 km/h) with the electronic gearbox system,

- the electric parking brake is being applied,

- some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.

In this case the warning lamp fl ashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to deactivate the system.

This is con fi rmed by the switch warning lamp coming on accompanied by a message in the screen.

This operation is perfectly normal.

If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.

Reactivation

Press the switch again.

The system is active again; this is confi rmed by the switch warning lamp going off and a message in the screen.

Operating fault Maintenance

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the

Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from automatic operation of START mode.

The system is reactivated automatically at every new start using the key.

In the event of a fault with the system, the switch warning lamp fl ashes then comes on continuously.


In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall: all the instrument panel warning lamps come on. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using the key.

This system requires a 12 V battery with a special speci fi cation and technology (reference numbers available from

PEUGEOT dealers).

Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT introduces the risk of malfunction of the system.

To charge the battery, use a 12 V charger and observe the polarity.

The Stop & Start system makes use of advanced technology. For any work on the system go to a quali fi ed workshop with the skills and equipment required, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.

167

VISUAL AND AUDIBLE FRONT

AND/OR REAR PARKING

SENSORS

168

System consisting of four proximity sensors, installed in the front and/or rear bumper.

It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able to detect obstacles located immediately below the bumper.

The parking sensors are switched on :

- by engaging reverse gear,

- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear.

This is accompanied by an audible signal and display of the vehicle in the multifunction screen.

The proximity information is indicated by:

- an audible signal which becomes more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,

- a graphic in the multifunction screen, with blocks which move closer to the vehicle.

The obstacle is located in relation to the emission of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear and right or left.

When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous and/or the

"Danger" symbol appears, depending on the multifunction screen version.

An object, such as a stake, a roadworks cone or any other similar object may be detected at the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer be detected when the vehicle moves nearer to it.

The parking sensors are switched off :

- when you exit reverse gear,

- when the speed is higher than 6 mph

(10 km/h) in forward gear,

- when the vehicle has been stationary for more than three seconds in forward gear.

The parking sensor system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver. ) Press button , the warning lamp comes on, the system is fully deactivated.

The system will be deactivated automatically when a trailer is being towed or when a bicycle carrier is fi tted (vehicle fi tted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).

If an operating fault occurs, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/ or a message appears in the multifunction screen, accompanied by an audible signal (short beep), when reverse gear is engaged.


In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow.

When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.

When the vehicle is being driven at a speed below approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h), certain sources of noise

(motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic drills, ...) may trigger the parking sensor audible signals.

Reactivation

) Press button again, the warning lamp switches off, the system is reactivated.

169

170

PARKING SPACE SENSORS Displays in the instrument panel

After measuring the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles, this system gives you information on:

- the possibility of fi tting into a free space, depending on the dimensions of your vehicle and the distances needed for manoeuvring,

- the level of dif fi culty of the manoeuvre to be performed.

The parking space sensor function warning lamp can have three different states:

- off: the function is not selected,

- on fi xed: the function is selected but the conditions for measurement are not yet met (direction indicator not operating, speed too high) or the measurement phase has ended,

- fl ashing: measurement is in progress or the message is being displayed.

You can activate the "parking space sensor" function by pressing button

The fi xed illumination of the warning lamp indicates that the function is selected.

The system does not measure spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle.

Operation

You have identi fi ed a parking space:

) Press button to activate the function.

) Activate the direction indicator on the side where the space is to be measured.

) During the measuring, go forward the length of the space, at a speed less than 12 mph (approximately

20 km/h), to prepare for your manoeuvre.

The system then measures the size of the space.

) The system informs you of the level of dif fi culty of the manoeuvre via a message in the multifunction screen accompanied by an audible signal.

The function displays the following types of message:

Parking possible

The function deactivates itself automatically:

- when you engage reverse gear,

- when you switch off the ignition,

- fi ve minutes after activation of the function or after the last measurement operation,

- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold of 45 mph (approximately

70 km/h) for one minute.

Parking dif fi

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the parking space is too great, the system may not operate.

Parking not advised

- The function remains available after each measurement and so can measure a number of places successively.

- In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or by ice or snow.

- The parking space sensor function deactivates the front parking sensors during the space measuring phase when you are in forward gear.

If there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

171

172

PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE AND

PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Innovation at the service of performance

The TOTAL Research and Development teams develop lubricants for PEUGEOT which satisfy the requirements of the latest technical innovations incorporated in PEUGEOT vehicles.

This ensures that you obtain the best performance and the maximum engine life.

Reduced exhaust emissions

TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the ef fi ciency of engines and the protection of the emissions post-treatment systems. It is crucial to observe the servicing recommendations made by PEUGEOT to ensure correct operation.

RECOMMENDS

BONNET

Opening

) Open the front left door.

) Pull the interior bonnet release lever A , located at the bottom of the door aperture.

) Push the exterior safety catch to the left and raise the bonnet.

) Unclip the stay C from its housing.

) Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet open.

The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents opening of the bonnet while the front left door is closed.

Do not open the bonnet in high winds.

When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay with care (risk of burns).

Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the

Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.

Closing

) Take the stay out of the support notch.

) Clip the stay in its housing.

) Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel.

) Pull on the bonnet to check that it is secured correctly.

173

174

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

(DIESEL)

On vehicle fi tted with HDi engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel; refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.

If the tank on your vehicle is fi tted with a misfuel prevention device, refer to the

"Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section.

1.6 litre HDi engine 2 litre HDi engine

) Fill the fuel tank with at least fi ve litres of diesel.

) Open the bonnet.

) If necessary, unclip the styling cover for access to the priming pump.

) Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the fi rst press).

) Operate the starter until the engine starts (if the engine does not start at the fi rst attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).

) If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine.

) Clip the styling cover back in place.

) Close the bonnet.

) Fill the fuel tank with at least fi ve litres of Diesel.

) Open the bonnet.

) If necessary, unclip the style cover for access to the priming pump.

) Slacken the bleed screw.

) Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until fuel appears in the transparent pipe.

) Tighten the bleed screw.

) Operate the starter until the engine starts (if the engine fails to start at the fi rst attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).

) If the engine fails to start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again, then the starter.

) Put the style cover back in position and clip it in place, ensuring that it has clipped correctly.

) Close the bonnet.

If the engine does not start fi rst time, don't keep trying. Start the procedure again from the beginning.

PETROL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids and for replacing certain components.

1.

Power steering reservoir. 4.

Brake uid reservoir.

2.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

3.

Coolant reservoir.

5.

Battery/Fuses.

6.

Fusebox.

7.

Air lter.

8.

Engine oil dipstick.

9.

Engine oil ller cap.

175

176

DIESEL ENGINES

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.

1.

Power steering reservoir.

2.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

3.

Coolant reservoir.

4.

Brake uid reservoir.

5.

Battery/Fuses.

6.

Fusebox.

7.

Air lter.

8.

Engine oil dipstick.

9.

Engine oil ller cap.

10.

Priming pump * .

11.

Bleed screw * .

* According to engine.

CHECKING LEVELS

If a level drops signi fi cantly, have the corresponding system checked by a


Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the servicing booklet and the requirements of the warranty. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.

Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).

Oil level

The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator on the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.

It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes).

PEUGEOT recommends that you check the level, and top up if necessary, every

3 000 miles (5 000 kms).

After topping up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping up.

Brake fluid level

The brake fl uid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.

Changing the fl uid

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

Fluid speci fi cation

The brake fl uid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and meet the DOT3 or DOT4 standard.

Engine oil change

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the interval for this operation.

In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.

Power steering fluid level

The power steering fl uid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. With the engine cold, unscrew the cap to check the level.

Oil speci fi cation

The oil must be the correct grade for your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

177

178

Coolant level Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid

The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.

The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might become caught by the fan blades.

In the case of vehicles fi tted with headlamp washers, the low fl uid level is indicated by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen.

Top up the reservoir when you next stop the vehicle.

Fluid speci fi

For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fl uid must not be topped up with or replaced with plain water.

In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.

To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.

Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle emission filter)

Used products

Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fl uids with the skin.

Most of these fl uids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fl uids into sewers or onto the ground.

Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop

(France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

Changing the coolant

The coolant does not have to be changed.

Fluid speci fi

The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

A low additive level is indicated by illumination of the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the instrument panel screen.

Topping up

This additive must be topped up by a

PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

CHECKS

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the servicing booklet and according to your engine.

Otherwise, have them checked by a


12 V battery

The battery does not require any maintenance.

However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened, particularly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "12 V battery" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.

Air filter and passenger compartment filter

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement intervals for these components. the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary .

Depending on the environment

(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and

A clogged passenger compartment fi lter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.

Oil filter

Replace the oil fi lter each time the engine oil is changed.

Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the replacement interval for this component.

Particle emission filter (Diesel)

The start of saturation of the particle fi lter is indicated by the temporary illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a message in the multi-function screen.

As soon as the traf fi c conditions permit, regenerate the fi lter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level.

On a new vehicle, the fi rst particle fi lter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal.

Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration.

This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a speci fi c 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and speci fi cation. The involvement of a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

179

180

Manual gearbox Brake pads Electric parking brake

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the servicing booklet for the details of the level checking interval for this component.

6-speed electronic gearbox


Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the checking interval for this component.

Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fl uid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

This system does not require any routine servicing. However, in the event of a problem, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

For more information, refer to the "Electric parking brake -

Operating faults" section.

Brake disc wear

For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a

PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

Automatic gearbox


Refer to the servicing booklet for details of the level checking interval for this component.

Only use products recommended by PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and speci fi cation.

In order to optimise the operation of units as important as the braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers very speci fi c products.

To avoid damaging the electrical units, the use of a high pressure washer in the engine compartment is strictly prohibited .

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE

REPAIR KIT

(5 SEAT VERSION) *

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.

List of tools Other accessories

Access to the kit

The kit is located in the boot under the concertina board.

Tools and are located in the boot interior trim, on the left-hand side.

All of these tools are speci fi c to your vehicle. Do not use them for other purposes.

1.

12 V compressor.

Contains a sealant cartridge for the temporary repair of a tyre and can be used to adjust the tyre pressures.

2.

Two chocks to chock the vehicle.

3.

Socket for security bolts (located in the glove box) * .

For adapting the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.

4.

Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing the vehicle".

5. Electric parking brake emergency release control.

Refer to "Electric parking brake" in the "Driving" section.

* Depending on destination country.

181

Description of the kit

182

A.

"Sealant" or "Air" position selector.

B.

On / off "O" switch.

C.

De fl ation button.

D.

Pressure gauge (in bar or p.s.i.).

E.

Compartment housing:

- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,

- various in fl ation adaptors for accessories, such as balls, bicycle tyres...

F.

Sealant

G.

White pipe with cap for repair.

H.

Black pipe for in fl ation.

I.

Speed limit sticker.

The speed limit sticker must be af fi xed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.

Repair procedure

1. Sealing


) Turn the selector to the

"sealant" position.

) Check that the switch B is in position "O" .

) Uncoil the white pipe G fully.

) Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.

) Connect the white pipe to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

) Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

) Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.

Take care, this product is harmful (e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.

Keep this product out of the reach of children.

183

184

) Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.

The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).

) Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe.

Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fl uid. Keep the kit to hand.

) Drive immediately for approximately three miles ( fi ve kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and

35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.

) Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the sealant product would be expelled through the pipe.

If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop for assistance.

Tyre under-in fl ation detection

If the vehicle is fi tted with tyre under-in fl in fl ation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

2. In fl ation


"air" position.

) Uncoil the black pipe H fully.

) Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel.


) Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

) Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to in fl ate: switch in position ; to de fl ate: switch B in position "O" and press button C ), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture).

A loss of pressure indicates that the puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualifi ed workshop for assistance.

) Remove and stow the kit.

) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph

[80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles

(200 km).

As soon as possible, go to a


You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.

185

186

Removing the cartridge Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories

You can also use the compressor, without injecting any product, to:

- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,

- in fl ate other accessories (balls, bicycle tyres...).

) Stow the black pipe.

) Detach the angled base from the white pipe.

) Support the compressor vertically.

) Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.

Beware of discharges of must be replaced. fl uid.

The expiry date of the fl uid is indicated on the cartridge.

The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it

After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a PEUGEOT dealer.

Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from PEUGEOT dealers or from a quali fi ed workshop.


"Air" position.

) Uncoil the black pipe H fully.

) Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel or accessory. necessary, supplied with the kit fi rst.

) Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

) Start the vehicle and let the engine run.

) Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to in sition position "O" fl ate: switch

; to de fl

in po-

ate: switch in

and press button ), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label or the accessory's pressure label.

) Remove the kit then stow it.

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE

REPAIR KIT

(7 SEAT VERSION) *

Complete system consisting of a compressor and a bottle of sealant which permits of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

Using the kit


) Tick the wheel to be repaired on the speed limitation sticker enclosed then af fi x the sticker to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

) Clip the bottle 1 on the compressor .

) Check that the switch is tilted to position "0" .

) Connect the pipe of the bottle to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

) Unwind the pipe of the compressor fully, then connect it to the bottle.

The kit is located in the boot, under the left hand seat in the 3 rd row.

This kit is available from a


It is designed to repair holes of a maximum diameter of 6 mm, only where located on the tyre tread or shoulder.

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated the tyre.


) Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

* According to country of sale.

187

188

) Switch on the compressor by tilting the switch A to position until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.

) Remove the compressor and store the bottle in the plastic bag, supplied in the kit, to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fl uid.

) Drive immediately for approximately two miles (three kilometres), at reduced speed (between 10 and

35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.

) Stop to check the repair and the pressure.

) Connect the compressor pipe directly to the valve of the repaired wheel.

If this pressure has not been reached after approximately fi ve to ten minutes, the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a PEUGEOT or a quali fi ed workshop to have your vehicle repaired.

) Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket again.

) Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

) Adjust the pressure using the

compressor (to in position ; to de fl ate: switch fl ate: switch

in position and press button

A in

B ), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the door aperture on the driver's side), then remember to check that the leak is plugged correctly (no further loss of pressure after several miles [kilometres]).

) Remove the compressor, then store the whole kit.

) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph

[80 km/h] max) for no more than approximately 125 miles (200 km).

) Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop as soon as possible to have the tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.

Take care, the bottle of fl uid contains ethylene-glycol. This product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.

Keep it out of reach of children.

The expiry date of the fl uid is indicated on the base of the bottle.

The bottle is designed for a single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.

After use, do not discard the bottle into the environment, take it to a

PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site.

Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of sealant product, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If the vehicle is fi tted with tyre under-in fl ation detection, the tyre under-in fl ation warning lamp will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

189

CHANGING A WHEEL *

Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the tools

List of tools *

The tools to are installed in a box, in the middle of the spare wheel, placed underneath the vehicle.

The tools and to are installed under the concertina boards, in the boot inner trim.

To gain access to them:

) open the boot,

) raise the concertina boards.

All of these tools are speci fi c to your vehicle. Do not use them for other purposes.

1.

Wheelbrace.

For removing the wheel trim and the wheel fi xing bolts.

2.

Jack with integral handle.

For raising the vehicle.

3.

"Bolt cover" tool (according to equipment).

For removing the bolt protectors

(covers) on alloy wheels.

4.

Centring guide.

For tting an alloy wheel to the hub.

5.

Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box).

For adapting the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.

6.

Two chocks to immobilise the vehicle.

7.

Wheelbrace extension.

For unscrewing/tightening the spare wheel carrier drive.

190


Other accessories

8. Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing the vehicle".

9.

Electric parking brake emergency release control.

Refer to "Electric parking brake" in the "Driving" section.

Wheel with trim

When removing the wheel , detach the trim fi rst using the wheelbrace pulling at the valve passage hole.

When re fi , re fi t the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.

191

Access to the spare wheel *

Taking out the wheel

) Raise the concertina board to reveal the spare wheel carrier drive nut.

) Turn this drive nut fully clockwise, using the wheelbrace and the extension 7 , to unwind the carrier cable.

The spare wheel is supported by a cable-driven carrier underneath the vehicle.

) Detach the wheel/box assembly from the rear of the vehicle.

) Remove the hook with its connection plate to release the wheel/box assembly, as shown in the illustration.


) Pull out the wheel to gain access to the box.

) Slide the box cover to the centre and remove it to gain access to the other tools.

Putting the wheel back in place

) Store the tools used in the box and close the cover.

) Position the box on the ground and centre the spare wheel on it.

) Pass the hook with its connection plate into the wheel then the box, as illustrated.

Tyre under-in fl ation detection

The spare wheel is not fi tted with a sensor. The punctured wheel must be repaired by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

) Raise the wheel/box assembly underneath the vehicle by turning the carrier drive nut anticlockwise using the wheelbrace 1 and the extension 7 .

) Tighten fully and check that the wheel is horizontally fl ush against the fl oor.

193

Removing a wheel

List of operations

) Remove the bolt cover from each of the bolts using the tool 3 (according to equipment).

) Fit the security socket on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).

) Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

194

Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traf fi c: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery ground.

Apply the parking brake unless it has been programmed to automatic mode, switch off the ignition and engage fi rst gear * to lock the wheels.

Check that the braking warning lamp and the P warning lamp on the parking brake control come on.

If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.

The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe.

Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

) Place the jack in contact with one of the two front A or rear B locations provided on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.

) Extend the jack 2 until its base plate is in contact with the ground. Ensure that the centreline of the jack base plate is directly below the location A or B used.

) Raise the vehicle until there is suffi cient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

) Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.

) Remove the wheel.

* position for the electronic gear control gearbox; P for the automatic gearbox.

Fitting a wheel

List of operations

) Put the wheel in place on the hub using the centring guide 4 .

) Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.

) Using the wheelbrace fi tted with the security socket , pre-tighten the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).

) Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel

If your vehicle is fi tted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fi tting it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the "space-saver" spare wheel.

The wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt.

) Lower the vehicle fully.

) Fold the jack 2 and detach it.

After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, fi rst remove the central cover.

When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop without delay.

Have the punctured wheel repaired and replace it on the vehicle as soon as possible.

) Using the wheelbrace fi tted with the security socket , tighten the security bolt (if your vehicle has them).

) Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

) Re fi t the bolt covers to each of the bolts (according to equipment).

) Store the tools in the box.

195

196

CHANGING A BULB

Front lamps

Model with halogen headlamps

Model with xenon and directional headlamps The headlamps are fi tted with polycarbonate glass with a protective coating:

) do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product,

) use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product,

) when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals,

) do not touch the bulb directly with your fi ngers, use lint-free cloths.

1.

Direction indicators

(HP24 amber-24W).

2.

Dipped beam headlamps

(H7-55W).

3.

Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).

4.

Daytime running lamps

(HP24-24W).

5.

Foglamps (PS24-24W).

6.

Sidelamps (W5-5W).

1.


(HP24 amber-24W).

2.

Dipped/main beam directional headlamps (D1S-35W).

3.

Daytime running lamps/ sidelamps (P21/5W).

4.

Foglamps (PS24-24W).

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must be replaced by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).

It is imperative to use only anti-ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order not to damage the headlamp.

Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and speci fi cation.

Changing direction indicator and daytime running lamp bulbs (models with halogen headlamps)

Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs

(models with halogen headlamps)

Changing main beam headlamp and sidelamp bulbs


) Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.

) Disconnect the bulb connector.

) Extract the bulb by pulling and change it.

To re fi t, carry out these operations in reverse order.



) Remove the bulb by pulling and change it.


197

198

Changing dipped beam and main beam headlamp bulbs (models with xenon headlamps)

D1S xenon bulbs must be changed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop as there is a risk of electrocution.

It is recommended that the D1S bulbs are changed at the same time when one of them fails.

Changing integrated direction indicator side repeaters

Changing foglamp bulbs

Changing sidelamp and daytime running lamp bulbs (models with xenon headlamps)



) Remove the bulb by pulling and change it.


) Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of the repeater between the repeater and the base of the mirror.

) Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater and remove it.

) Disconnect the repeater connector.


Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop to obtain replacement repeaters.


Changing direction indicator bulbs

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

You can also contact a

PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop to have these bulbs changed.

Rear lamps

Changing brake lamp and direction indicator bulbs

) Remove the two lamp unit fi xing nuts.

) Pull the lamp rearwards (a positioning lug retains the lamp).

) Disconnect the lamp connector.

) Press the four tabs and remove the bulb holder.

1.


(PY21W-21W).

2.

Brake lamps

(P21W-21W).

3.

Sidelamps

(LEDs).

4.

Reversing lamp

(P21W).

5.

Foglamp

(P21W).

) Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.


Changing sidelamps (LEDs) Changing the third brake lamp bulb Changing the number plate lamp bulbs (W5-5W)

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Changing foglamp or reversing lamp bulbs

) Open the boot and remove the upper seal.

) Unscrew the two nuts.

) Press the threaded pins while supporting the lamp from the outside.

) Disconnect the connector and remove the screenwash pipe.

) Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the outer holes of the lens.

) Push it outwards to unclip.

) Remove the lens.

) Pull the bulb out and change it.

200

) Reach under the bumper.

) Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.

) Press the pairs of clips the bulb holder.

then then C to detach and gain access to

CHANGING A FUSE Changing a fuse

Procedure for replacing a failed fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.

Before changing a fuse, the cause of the failure must be identi fi ed and rectifi ed.

) Identify the failed fuse by checking the condition of its fi lament.

Installing electrical accessories

Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment.

Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Good Failed


The fuse extraction tweezer is fi tted to the back of the dashboard fusebox cover.

To gain access to it:

) Remove the cover completely.

) Remove the tweezer.

) Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing.

) Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating.

) Check that the number marked on the fusebox, the rating marked on the fuse and the following tables all agree.

PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by

PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

201

202

Dashboard fuses

The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard.

Fuse tables

F us e

N°

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

Ratin g

(A)

15

-

5

Rear wiper.

Not used.

Airbag control unit.

Functions

10

30

30

5

Electrochrome rear view mirror, air conditioning, switching and protection unit, rear multimedia.

Front one-touch electric windows.

Rear one-touch electric windows.

Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps, rear reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box lighting, centre armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay control.

Access to the fuses

) Refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools".

Fuse

N°

F8

F13

F14

F15

F17

SH

F9

F10

F11

F12

5

15

30

40

-

30

15

15

15

Rating

(A)

20

Functions

Audio system, audio/telephone, CD changer, multifunction screen, tyre under-in fl ation detection, alarm siren, alarm control unit, telematic unit.

Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.

Steering mounted controls.

Low current ignition switch.

Trailer presence, rain / brightness sensor, supply for fuses F32, F34, F35.

Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.

Instrument panel, instrument panel screen, supply for fuse F33.

Locking and deadlocking.

Rear screen demist/defrost, supply for fuse F30.

PARC shunt.

203

204

F36

F37

F38

F39

F40

Fuse

N°

F29

F30

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

Rating

(A)

-

5

30

5

10

5

10

10

20

30

20

-

Functions

Not used

Heated door mirrors.

Boot 12V socket.

Electronic gear control gearbox gear lever.

Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.

Seat belt warning lamps display.

Parking sensors, Hi-Fi ampli fi er authorisation.

Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.

Hi-Fi ampli fi er.

Driver's electric seat.

Panoramic sunroof blind.

Not used.

Engine compartment fuses

The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery.

Fuse table

Fuse

N°

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

Access to the fuses

) Unclip the cover.

) Change the fuse (see corresponding paragraph).

) When you have fi nished, close the cover carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

Rating

(A)

20

15

10

10

15

10

10

20

10

Functions

Engine management unit supply, injection pump and EGR electrovalves (2 litre HDI), injectors

(2 litre HDI).

Horn.

Front / rear screenwash.

Daytime running lamps.

Canister purge electrovalves, turbine discharge and Turbo pressure regulation electrovalves

(1.6 litre THP), oil vapour heater (1.6 litre THP), diesel heater (1.6 litre HDI).

Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle emission fi lter pump (Diesel), Distance alert, engine coolant level detector, mirror adjustment control.

Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox, directional headlamps height adjustment motor.

Starter motor control.

Clutch and brake pedal switches.

30

40

Engine management unit actuators (petrol: ignition coils, electrovalves, oxygen sensors, injectors, heaters, fuel pump, electronic thermostat) (Diesel: electrovalves, heaters).

Air conditioning blower.

205

206

Fuse

N°

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

Rating

(A)

30

40

30

10

10

15

15

15

Functions

Windscreen wipers slow / fast speed.

Built-in systems interface supply (ignition positive).

Air pump.

Right-hand main beam headlamp.

Left-hand main beam headlamp.

Left-hand dipped headlamp.

Right-hand dipped headlamp.

Oil vapour heater (1.6 litre VTi), Turbo pressure regulation electrovalve (Diesel), engine coolant level detector (Diesel).

10

5

Electronic thermostat, variable timing electrovalves,

Turbo pressure regulation electrovalve (Diesel), engine coolant level detector (Diesel).

Fan assembly relay supply, Valvetronic relay control (1.6 litre VTi), Turbo cooling (1.6 litre THP), air fl ow sensor (1.6 litre HDI).

* The maxi-fuses and certain other fuses provide additional protection for the electrical systems. All work on the these fuses must be carried out by a


Table of mini and midi-fuses above the battery

Fuse N° Rating (A)

F1

F2

F3

-

5

5

Functions

Not used.

Dual function brake switch.

Battery charge unit.

F4

F5

F6

F7 *

F8

F9 *

*

F10 *

F11 *

F12 *

25

5

15

80

60

40

100

30

80 / 30

ABS/DSC electrovalves.

ABS/DSC control unit.

Automatic gearbox, electronic gear control gearbox.

Power steering electropump assembly.

Fan assembly.

Pre-heat unit (Diesel), Valvetronic electric motor

(1.6 litre THP).

ABS/DSC electropump assembly.

Switching and protection unit.

Electronic gear control gearbox electropump assembly.

Table of maxi-fuses

Fuse N° Rating (A)

MF1 * -

MF2 * 30

MF3 *

MF4 *

MF5 *

MF6 *

MF7 *

MF8 *

50

80

80

30

30

20

Not used.

Trailer fuse box.

Electric parking brake.

Heated front seats.

Headlamp wash.

Functions

Passenger compartment fusebox.

Built-in systems interface.

Built-in systems interface.

207

12 V BATTERY

Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.

Access to the battery

208

The presence of this label indicates the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and speci fi cation, for which the involvement of a PEUGEOT dealer or quali fi ed workshop is required when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Failure to observe this recommendation may cause premature wear of the battery.

After re fi tting the battery, the Stop & Start system will only be active after several hours depending on the climatic conditions and the state of charge of the battery

(up to about 8 hours).

The battery is located under the bonnet.


) open the bonnet using the interior release lever, then the exterior safety catch,

) secure the bonnet stay,

) remove the plastic cover on the (+) terminal,

) if necessary, unclip the fusebox to remove the battery.

Disconnecting the (+) cable

) Raise the locking tab fully to release the cable terminal clamp E .

Reconnecting the (+) cable

) Position the open clamp of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.

) Press vertically on the clamp to position it correctly on the battery.

) Lock the clamp by spreading the positioning lug and then lowering the tab D .

The Stop & Start battery does not have to be disconnected for charging.

Do not apply excessive force on the tab as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.

Starting using another battery

When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables.

First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery.

Do not try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger.

Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.

) Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the fl at battery A , then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B .

) Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery (or earth point on the other vehicle).

) Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point the engine mounting).

C on the broken down vehicle (or on

) Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.

) Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run

If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.

) Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.

Charging the battery using a battery charger

) Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.

) Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.

) Connect the battery starting with the negative terminal (-).

) Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate (whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.

The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste.

Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.

209

210

Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery.

All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked fl ames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fi re.

Do not try to charge a frozen battery; the battery must fi rst be thawed out to avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery has been frozen, before charging have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.

Do not reverse the polarity and use only a 12 V charger.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.

Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals fi rst.

Wash your hands afterwards.

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery.

Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.

Following reconnection of the battery

Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if problems remain following this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualifi ed workshop.

Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on version):

- the remote control key,

- the electric blind(s),

- ...

Do not push the vehicle to start the engine if you have an electronic gearbox or automatic gearbox.

LOAD REDUCTION MODE

System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery.

When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen...

The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

If the telephone is being used at this time:

- it will be maintained for 5 minutes with the hands-free kit of your Peugeot

Connect Sound or Peugeot Connect

Navigation,

- it will still be possible to fi nish the call with the Peugeot Connect

Media.

CHANGING A WIPER BLADE

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE Exiting economy mode

System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a suf fi cient level of charge in the battery.

After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.

This period may be greatly reduced if the battery is not fully charged.

These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven.

To restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run for at least 5 minutes.

Switching to economy mode

Once this time has elapsed, a message appears in the screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.

Let the engine run for the duration speci fi ed to ensure that the battery charge is suffi cient.

Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery.

A fl at battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the "Battery" paragraph).

Before removing a front wiper blade

) Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.

Removing

) Raise the corresponding wiper arm.

) Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.

Fitting

) Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.

) Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

After fitting a front wiper blade

) Switch on the ignition.

) Operate the wiper stalk again to park the wiper blades.

211

TOWING THE VEHICLE

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.

Towing from the front


Towing from the rear

212

) On the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.

) Screw the towing eye in fully.

) Install the towing bar.

) Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

) On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.

) Screw the towing eye in fully.

) Install the towing bar.

) Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle.

The towing eye is installed under the left-hand concertina board, in the boot interior trim.


) open the boot,

) raise the concertina board,

) remove the towing eye from the holder.

) Place the gear lever in neutral (position on the electronic gear control gearbox or automatic gearbox).

Failure to observe this special condition could result in damage to certain braking components and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your country.

Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.

The person at the wheel of the towed vehicle must have a valid driving licence.

When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.

When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.

TOWING A TRAILER

Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with additional lighting and signalling.

Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.

Driving advice

Distribution of loads

) Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above

1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every

1 000 metres of altitude.

In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:

- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,

- 4 wheel drive vehicle,

- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake,

- towing with only two wheels on the ground,

- where there is no approved towing bar available...

Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

Refer to the "Technical data" section for details of the weights and towed loads which apply to your vehicle.

Side wind

) Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind. We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fi tting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

If the towbar is not fi tted by a

PEUGEOT dealer, it is imperative that it is fi tted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.

) To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

213

214

The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature.

In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

FITTING ROOF BARS

) If the warning lamp and the

STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Braking

Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.

To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long mountain type of descent, the use of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres

) Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.

Lighting

) Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer.

When fi tting transverse roof bars, use the four quickfi t fi xings provided for this purpose:

) lift the concealing fl aps,

) open the fi xing covers on each bar using the key,

) put each fi xing in place and lock them on the roof one by one,

) ensure that roof bars are correctly fi tted (by shaking them),

) close the fi xing covers on each bar using the key.

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine PEUGEOT towbar is used.

Maximum authorised weight on the roof rack, for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm

(with the exception of bicycle carriers): kg.

If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profi le of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fi xings on the roof.

Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than the vehicle.

If your vehicle is roof fi fi tted with

nishers, do not use them for carrying loads.

VERY COLD CLIMATE SCREEN

Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.

Before fi tting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fi tted and removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali fi ed workshop.

Fitting Removal

) Offer up one of the three screens to the front of the lower section of the front bumper (do not use the upper ventilation grille position).

) Press on the edges A to engage its fi xing clips.

) Press on the middle at to complete the engagement of the fi xing clips.

) Repeat the operation for the other two screens.

Depending on the model, the clips point either to the left or to the right.

) Pass your ngers through the upper grille location.

) From behind, push the clips in the opposite direction then pull the part towards you.

) Start with the upper screen , then the centre screen and fi nish with the lower screen .

Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screen:

- when the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,

- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

215

216

ACCESSORIES

A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.

They are all adapted to your vehicle and bene fi t from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.

"Transport solutions":

For leisure pursuits: roof bars, bicycle carrier on towbar, bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box, booster seats and child seats, side blinds, under shelf storage.

Trailer towbar, which must be fi tted by a

PEUGEOT dealer.

"Protection":

mats * , boot tray, luggage net, coat hanger fi xed on head restraint, stainless steel or carbon fi bre style door sills.

"Multimedia":

audio systems, ampli fi ers, satellite navigation systems, Bluetooth hands-free system, CD changer, speakers, DVD player, USB Box, front and rear parking sensors, additional

Bluetooth wireless headphones, Bluetooth audio headphones mains charger.

"Style":

seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, leather gear lever knob, foglamps, door de fl ectors, spoiler, styling strips, alloy wheels, trims, chrome-plated door handle shells.

"Safety and security":

anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel security bolts, fi rst aid kit, breathalyzer, warning triangle, high visibility vest, stolen vehicle tracking system, dog guard, snow chains.

Installation of radio communication transmitters

Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the speci fi cation of transmitters which can be fi tted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, speci fi c installation requirements), in line with the

Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive (2004/104/EC).

Depending on the legislation in force in the country, it may be compulsory to have a high visibility safety vest, warning triangle and spare bulbs and fuses available in the vehicle.

The fi tting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by

PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption.

Please note this precaution. You are advised to contact a PEUGEOT representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.

You can also obtain cleaning and maintenance products (exterior and interior), products for topping up (screenwash fl fi lls (sealant cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...) from PEUGEOT dealers.

* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly,

- never t one mat on top of another.

PETROL ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Petrol engine

Gearbox

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)

Max power: EU standard (kW) *

Max power engine speed (rpm)

Max torque: EU standard (Nm)

Max torque engine speed (rpm)

1.6 litre VTi

120 hp

Manual

(5-speed)

1 598

77 x 85.8

88

6 000

160

4 250

Manual

(6-speed)

1.6 litre THP

156 hp

Automatic

(6-speed)

1 598

77 x 85.8

115

6 000

240

1 400

Catalytic converter

Oil capacities (in litres)

Engine (with fi lter replacement)

yes yes

4.25 4.25

* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions de fi ned in European legislation (directive 1999/99/CE).

217

218

PETROL WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (IN KG)

Engines

Gearbox

1.6 litre VTi

120 hp

Manual

(5-speed)

Seats

- Payload

5

1 427

1 502

573

7

1 454

1 532

736

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 000 2 190

- Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient trailer within the GTW limit)

3 200

1 200

1 400

3 290

1 100

- Recommended nose weight

750

70

1.6 litre THP

156 hp

Manual (6-speed) /

Automatic (6 speed)

5 7

1 460

1 535

1 490

1 565

590 735

2 050 2 225

3 400 3 425

1 350

1 550

1 200

1 500

750

70

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).

** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.

DIESEL ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Engines

Gearbox

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)

Max power: EU standard (kW) *

Max power engine speed (rpm)

Max torque: EU standard (Nm)

Max torque engine speed (rpm)

1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi

115 hp

Manual

(6-speed)

Electronic gear control

(6-speed)

1 560

75 x 88.3

2 litre Turbo HDi

150 hp

Manual

(6-speed)


163 hp

Automatic

(6-speed)

1 997

85 x 88

82

4 000

270

1 750

110/120

3 750

320/340

2 000

Catalytic converter

Particle emission fi lter

Oil capacities (in litres)

Engine (with fi lter replacement)

yes

yes

yes

yes

3.75 -

* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions de fi ned in European legislation (directive 1999/99/CE).

219

220

DIESEL WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (IN KG)

Engine

Gearbox

Seats

- Payload

5

1 475

1 550

595

Manual

(6-speed)

7

1 502

1 578

748


115 hp


(6-speed)

5 7

1 475

1 550

595

1 502

1 578

748

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 070 2 250 2 070 2 250


- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient

3 170

1 100

3 250

1 000

3 170

1 100

3 150

900 trailer within the GTW limit)

1 300 1 300 1 300 1 100

745 750 745 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 70







Diesel engine

Gearbox

Seats

- Payload

5

1 475

1 550

595

Manual

(6-speed) Score

7

1 502

1 578

748


110 hp


(6-speed) Score

5 7

1 475

1 550

595

1 502

1 578

748

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 070 2 250 2 070 2 250

- Gross vehicle weight (MTRA) on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient

2 950

880

2 950

700

2 920

850

2 950

700 trailer within the GTW limit)

1 080 900 1 050 900

745 750 745 700

- Recommended nose weight 70 70






221

222


Diesel engine

Gearbox

Seats

- Payload

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

5

1 563

1 638

562


150 hp

Manual

(6-speed)

7

1 593

1 668

717

2 125 2 310


- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient trailer within the GTW limit)

3 475

1 350

1 550

3 510

1 200

1 500


750

70

5

1 589

1 664

536


163 hp

Automatic

(6-speed)

7

1 619

1 694

711

2 125 2 330

3 525

1 400

1 600

3 530

1 200

1 500

750

70






Engines

Gearbox

Model codes

Manual

(6-speed)

9HZ

1 481

1 556

2 225


115 hp


(6-speed)

9HZ

1 482

1 557

2 230

Manual

(6-speed)

9HR

1 481

1 556

2 200


150 hp

Manual

(6-speed)

RHE

1 572

1 647

2 310 - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) **

- Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient ***

3 120 3 170 3 475

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient ****

- Braked trailer (with load transfer within the GTW limit)

895

X

890

X

970

X

1 165

X


750

70

750

70


** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as de fi ned in point 2.7 of the

Directive.

*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as de fi ned in point 2.7 of the Directive.

**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1000 metres of altitude.


223

224

DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS

Various visible markings for the identi cation and tracing of your vehicle. fi -

A.

Vehicle Identi fi under the bonnet.

This number is engraved on the bodywork near the damper support.

B.

Vehicle identi fi cation Number

(VIN) on the windscreen lower crossmember.

This number is indicated on a selfadhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.

C.

Manufacturer's label.

The VIN is indicated on a selfd estroying label af fi xed to the door aperture, on the driver's side.

D.

Tyre/paint label.

This label is fi tted to the middle pillar, on the driver's side.

It bears the following information:

- the tyre in

-

- fl ation pressures with and without load, the tyre sizes, the brands of tyre recommended by the manufacturer,

- the fl ation pressure of the spare wheel,

- the paint colour code.

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.

Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption.

225

226

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

227

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

In an emergency, press this button for more than

2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message con fi rm that the call has been made to the

PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS call centre * .

The green LED remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green

LED goes off. Cancellation is con fi rmed by a voice message .

To cancel a call, tell the PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS call centre that the call was a mistake.

PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS immediately locates you vehicle, starts communication with you in your language ** , and where necessary sends the appropriate public emergency services ** . In countries where the service is not available, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

* Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers and to technological and technical limitations.

** Depending on the geographical cover of PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS,

PEUGEOT CONNECT ASSISTANCE and the of fi cial national language selected by the owner of the vehicle.

The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services are available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.

228

Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down.

A voice message con fi rms that the call has been made ** .

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.

The cancellation is con fi rmed by a voice message.

OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM

When the ignition is switched on, the green

LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

If the orange LED fl ashes: there is a system fault.

If the orange LED is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced.

In either case, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the con fi guration of these services and, if desired, modi fi ed to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, con fi guration is possible in the of fi cial national language of your choice.

For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of

PEUGEOT CONNECT services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING

Peugeot Connect Media

Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a

Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not operational.

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible signal is heard and a "Con fi rmation / Cancellation" screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).

A call is made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency services.

In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent to the emergency services (112).

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with fl ashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.

Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services.

Select "Customer call" to request any information about the PEUGEOT marque.

Customer call

Select "PEUGEOT Assistance" to make a roadside assistance call.

PEUGEOT Assistance

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

*

0 #

This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a

PEUGEOT dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the

PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the con fi guration of these services and, if desired, modi fi ed to suit your wishes.

229

230

Peugeot Connect Media Navigation

(NG4 3D)

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

GPS EUROPE

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.

For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off following the activation of the energy economy mode.

CONTENTS

01 First steps

02 Voice commands and steering mounted controls

03 General operation

04 Navigation - Guidance

05 Traffic information

06 Radio

07 Music media players

08 Using the telephone

09 Screen menu map

Frequently asked questions p. p.

232

234 p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

237

242

251

253

254

259

264

269

231

Access to the Media Menu

(audio CD, Jukebox,

Auxiliary input).

Display the list of tracks.

Change the audio source.

Access to the Navigation

Menu and display recent destinations.

Abandon the current operation.

Long press: return to main display. Access to the Traf fi c Menu.

Access to the Address book

Menu.

Access to the Radio Menu

Display the list of stations in alphabetical order (FM band) or frequency order (AM band).

Audio settings (Balance /

Fader, Bass / Treble, Musical ambience...).

Adjust volume (each source is independent, including navigation messages and alerts).

Long press: reinitialise the system.

Short press: mute.

Automatic search down/up for radio frequencies.

Select previous/next CD or MP3 track.

SD card reader.

Short press: clears the last character.

Access to the "SETUP" menu

(con fi guration).

Long press: GPS coverage.

Enter the numbers or letters using the alpha-numeric keypad.

Presetting 10 radio frequencies.

232

Press to left / right:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous / next frequency.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the previous / next track.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": horizontal movement on the map.

Press up / down:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous / next radio station in the list.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the MP3 folder.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": vertical movement on the map.

Go the the next or previous page in a menu.

Movement on the virtual keypad displayed.

OK: con fi rm the highlighted item.

Select successive display in the screen of "MAP" / "NAV"

(if navigation in progress) / "TEL"

(if a call is in progress) / "RADIO" or "MEDIA" being played.

CALL: access to the Phone menu.

Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.

Normal display or black screen.

END CALL: access to the

Phone menu.

End a call in progress or reject an incoming call, Bluetooth connection.

Rotate the dial:

With display of the "RADIO" screen: select the previous / next radio station in the list.

With display of the "MEDIA" screen: select the previous / next CD or MP3 track.

With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": zoom the map in/out.

Movement of the menu selection cursor.

233

234

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

VOICE COMMANDS -

VOICE RECO. INITIATION

Before using the system for the fi rst time, you are advised to listen to, say and practice the tutorial.

SETUP

Press the SETUP button and select the "Language & Speech" function.

Turn the ring and select "Voice control".

Activate voice recognition.

Select "Tutorial".

Pressing the end of the lighting control stalk activates voice recognition.

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in the tables below.

Speak and Peugeot Connect Media acts.

CONTEXT

GENERAL

RADIO

NAVIGATION

SAY

Help address book

Help voice control

Help media

Help navigation

Help telephone

Help radio

Cancel

Correction

Select station

Station <tts:stationName>

Read out station list

Enter frequency

Select wave band

AM

FM

TA on

TA off

Destination input

Voice advice off

Voice advice on

Save address

Start guidance

Abort guidance

Navigate entry

POI Search

ACTION

Access to the address book help

Access to the voice recognition help

Access to the media management help

Access to the guidance, navigation help

Access to the telephone help

Access to the radio help

To cancel a voice command which is in progress

Request to correct the last voice recognition carried out

Clear

Select a radio station

Select a radio station using its RDS description <tts:station Name> from the

RADIO list

Listen to the list of stations available

Listen to the frequency of the current radio station

Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)

Change the frequency waveband to AM

Change the frequency waveband to FM

Activate Traf fi c Info (TA)

Deactivate Traf fi c Info

Command to enter a new destination address

Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions

Activate the spoken guidance instructions

Save an address in the address book

Start guidance (once the address has been entered)

Stop the guidance

Start guidance to an entry in the address book

Start guidance to a point of interest


VOICE COMMANDS -

VOICE RECO. INITIATION

CONTEXT

MEDIA

SAY

Media

Select media

Single slot

Jukebox

USB

External device

SD-Card

Track <1 - 1000>

Folder <1 - 1000>

ACTION

Select the MEDIA source

Choose a source

Select the CD player source

Select the Jukebox source

Select the USB player source

Select the audio AUX input source

Select the SD card source

Select a speci fi c track (number between 1 and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM

Select a Folder (number between 1 and

1 000) on the active MEDIUM

TELEPHONE Phone menu

Enter number

Phone book

Dial

Save number

Accept

Reject

ADDRESS

BOOK

Address book menu

Call <entry>

Navigate <entry>

Open the Telephone Menu

Enter a telephone number to be called

Open the phone book

Make a call

Save a number in the phone book

Accept an incoming call

Reject an incoming call

Open the address book

Call fi le using its < fi le> description as described in the address book

Start guidance to an address in the address book using its < fi le> description

235

236


STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Wiper stalk: display "RADIO" and "MEDIA".

Lighting stalk: activate voice commands with a short press; indication of the current navigation instruction with a long press

Radio: select the previous/next pre-set station.

CD audio: select the previous/next track .

If "MEDIA" is displayed in the screen:

MP3 CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the previous/next folder.

Select the previous/next item in the contacts list.

Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.

CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the next track.

CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast forwards.

Volume increase.

Change audio source.

Start a call from the contacts list

Call/hang up the telephone.

Con fi rm a selection.

Press for more than 2 seconds: telephone menu.

Volume decrease.

Mute: press the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously.

The sound is restored by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency.

CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the previous track.

CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast backwards.

03 GENERAL OPERATION

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

RADIO /MUSIC MEDIA/

VIDEO

TELEPHONE

(If a conversation is in progress)

FULL SCREEN MAP

NAVIGATION

(If guidance is in progress)

SETUP

SETUP: access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language * and voice functions * , voice initialisation (section 09), date and time * , display, unit and system parameters.

* Available according to model.

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration mode.

For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth

(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.

TRAFFIC

MEDIA

TRAFFIC: access to the Traf fi c Menu: display of the current traf fi c alerts.

MEDIA:

"DVD-audio" menu

"DVD-Video" menu

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the

"Screen menu map" section of this handbook.

237



Pressing OK gives access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN

PROGRESS):

Abort guidance

1

1

Repeat advice

1

Block road

2

Unblock

2

More

2

Less

2

Calculate

2

Zoom/Scroll

1

2

Browse route

Route info

2

Show destination

238

2

Trip info

3

Route type

3

Avoid

3

Satellites

3

Stopovers

2

Browse route

2

Zoom/Scroll

1

Voice advice

1

Route options

2

Route type

2

Route dynamics

2

Avoidance criteria

2

Recalculate

TELEPHONE:

1

End call

1

Hold call

1

Dial

1

DTMF-Tones

1

1

Private mode

Micro off

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

1

TA

1

Play options

2

Normal order

2

Random track

2

Scan

1

Select media



RADIO:

1

In FM mode

2

TA

2

RDS

2

Radiotext

2

Regional prog.

2

AM

1

In AM mode

2

TA

2

Refresh AM list

2

FM

FULL SCREEN MAP:

1

Abort guidance / Resume guidance

1

Set destination / Add stopover

1

POIs nearby

1

Position info

2

Guidance options

3

Navigate to

3

Dial

3

Save position

3

Zoom/Scroll

1

Map Settings

2

2D Map

2

2.5D Map

2

3D Map

2

North Up

1

2

Heading Up

Zoom/Scroll

AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):

1

Stop

2

Group

3

Group 1.2/n

2

Play options

3

Normal order / Random track / Scan

1

TA

2

Select media

239

240



VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):

1

Play

2

Stop

2

DVD menus

3

DVD menu

3

DVD top menu

3

List of titles

3

List of chapters

2

DVD Options

3

Audio

3

Subtitles

3

Angle

Examples:

PEUGEOT Connect Media IS:

- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed fl at, in perspective or in 3D.

Flat map

Map in perspective

Map in 3D

- con fi guration of the system by means of voice commands.

241

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

SELECTING A DESTINATION

The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.

During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance instruction.

NAV

Press the NAV button.


1

SETUP

*

0 #

Select the "Address input" function and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

242

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation

Menu function.

Press the NAV button again or select the Navigation Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Destination input" function and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Once the country has been selected, turn the ring and select the town function. Press OK to con fi rm.

Select the letters of the town one by one con fi rming each time by pressing OK.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

7

PQRS

*

8

TUV

0

9

WXYZ

#


1

SETUP

* 0 #

A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.


It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".

Press OK then select "Map Settings" and con fi rm.

Turn the ring and select OK.

Press OK to con fi rm.

RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC SETUP

1

4

GHI

5

JKL

6

MNO

*

0 #

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly after selecting the "Postal code" function.

Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" and "House number" functions.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address entered in a directory fi le. Press OK to con fi rm the selection.

The Peugeot Connect Media allows more than 4 000 contact records to be saved.

To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:

Delete entryy Delete list

Then select "Start route guidance" and the press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the route type:

"Fast route", "Short route", or

"Optimized route" and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

7

PQRS

*

8

TUV

0

9

WXYZ

#

Select the road with the colour corresponding to the route chosen and press OK to con fi rm and start guidance.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".

Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

243

244


SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY

"HOME ADDRESS"

To be set as the "Home address", an address must fi rst be entered in the address book, for example from "Destination input" /

"Address input" then "Save to address book".

Select your home address and con fi rm.

Then select "Edit entry" and con fi rm.

Edit entry


1

SETUP

* 0

#

NAV

Press the NAV button twice to display the Navigation Menu.

Navigation Menu


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

*

0 #

Select "Set as Home address" and con fi rm to save.

Set as home address


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Choose from address book" and con fi rm. RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

Destination input

To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the

Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and con fi rm.

Then select "Navigate HOME" and con fi rm to start guidance.


ROUTE OPTIONS

When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings" then "2D Map/2.5D Map/3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.

NAV



1

SETUP

*

0 #

Select the "Route dynamics" function.

This function provides access to the "Traf fi c independent", "Semidynamic" and "Dynamic" options.


1

SETUP

* 0 #



1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Route options" function and press OK to con fi rm. RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Avoidance criteria" function. This function provides access to the "Avoid" options (motorways, toll roads, ferries, tunnels).


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Avoidance criteria

Select the "Route type" function and press OK to con fi rm. This function allows you to change the route type.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Turn the ring and select the

"Recalculate" function to take into account the route options selected.

Press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Recalculate

245

246


ADDING A STOPOVER

Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.

NAV



1

SETUP

*

0 #

Press the NAV button again or select the "Navigation" Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Enter a new address, for example.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Once the new address has been entered, select "Start route guidance" and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Position the stopover on the list and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 # Select the "Stopovers" function and press OK to con fi rm. RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Add stopover" function

(5 stopovers maximum) and press

OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select

"Recalculate" and press OK to con fi rm.

To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select

"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the list using the ring to change the order, con fi rm its new position and fi nish with "Recalculate").


SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST

(POI)

The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

NAV



1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI in city" function to search for POIs in the city required.

Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.

POI in cityy


1

SETUP

* 0 #



1

SETUP

* 0

#

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad.

Select the "POI search" function and press OK to con fi rm.

POI search

Select the "POI nearby" function to search for POIs around the vehicle.

POI nearbyy

Select the "POI near destination" function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route.

POI near destination


1

SETUP

* 0 #


1

SETUP

* 0 #


1

SETUP

* 0

#

Select the "POI in country" function to search for POIs in the country required.

POI in countryy


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "POI near route" function to search for POIs near the route.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

POI near route

247

248


LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.


UPDATING POIs

Download the "POIs" update fi le onto an SD card or USB memory stick from the Internet. This service is available at http://peugeot.navigation.com.

NAV

Press NAV, select Navigation Menu, then "Settings", then "Update personal

POI".


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Settings

The fi les must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.

Select the medium ("USB" or "SD-Card") used and press OK.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Insert the medium (SD card or USB memory stick) containing the POI database into the system's SD card reader or USB port.

Successful downloading is con fi rmed by a message.

The system restarts.

The POIs version can be found in the SETUP \ System menu.

249

250


SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS

When the navigation is displayed in the screen, press OK then select or deselect "Voice advice" to activate or deactivate the spoken guidance instructions.

Use the volume button to adjust the volume.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted during this type of alert.

POINTS OF INTEREST AND RISK AREAS

SETTINGS

NAV



1

SETUP

* 0

#



1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the "Settings" function and press OK to con fi rm.

Settings

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0

#

Select the "POI categories on Map" function to select the POIs to be displayed on the map by default.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Set parameters for risk areas" to gain access to the "Display on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert" functions.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND

DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

The TMC (Traf fi c Message Channel) messages provide information relating to traf fi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.

The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.

Select the fi lter of your choice:

TRAFFIC

Press the TRAFFIC button.


1

SETUP

*

0 #


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traf fi c Menu sorted in order of proximity.

Press the TRAFFIC button again or select the Traf fi c Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Traf fi c Menu


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Select preferred list" and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Select "Geo. Filter".

Geo. Filter


1

SETUP

* 0 #

When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition of a geographic fi lter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles

(5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed on the map. The geographic fi lter follows the movement of the vehicle.

The fi lters are independent and their results are concealed.

We recommend:

- a fi c,

- a fi lter on the route on motorway journeys.

251

252


PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Red and yellow triangle: traf fi c information, for example:

RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

- the station transmits TA messages.

- the station does not transmit TA messages.

The TA (Traf fi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traf fi c report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

With the current audio source displayed on the screen, press the dial.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0

#

The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

TA

Select Traf fi c Announcements (TA) and press the dial to con fi rm and go to the associated settings.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

06 RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

RADIO

Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order.


Select the station required by turning the ring and press to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

*

0 #

While listening to the radio, press buttons and for the automatic search for a lower or higher frequency.


When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the previous or next station on the list.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than

2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep con fi rms that it has been stored.

Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE

When the current radio station is displayed on the screen, press OK.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to the following short-cuts:

TA

RDS

Radiotext

AM

Select the function required and press OK to con fi rm to gain access to the corresponding settings.


1

SETUP

* 0

#

RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

253

254

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/

USB PLAYER

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.

The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension

".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.

It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of fi le (.mp4,.m3u...) can be played.

Connecting an IPod:

To play MP3 type fi les, connect the IPod using the USB port

(limited functions).

To play ITunes fi les, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket (AUX).

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible

(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted to FAT 32.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.

To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.


SELECTING/PLAYING

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA

SD CARD/USB PLAYER

Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player, the SD card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the USB port. Play begins automatically.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK SETUP

1

4

GHI

2

ABC

5

JKL

3

DEF

6

MNO

7

PQRS

8

TUV

9

WXYZ

*

0 #

MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.

Press the MEDIA button again or select the "Media" Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

"Media" Menu

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Media" Menu.

Select the "Select media" function and press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Press this button.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select media

When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed, turn the ring up or down to select the previous or next compatible source.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0

#

Select the music source required.

Press OK to con fi rm. Play begins.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

*

0 #

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button.


The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.

We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

255


JUKEBOX

COPYING A CD, A USB MEMORY STICK OR AN SD CARD

ONTO THE HARD DISK

When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.

Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB memory stick or an SD card.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

ADDR

BOOK SETUP

*

1

4

GHI

2

ABC

5

JKL

3

DEF

6

MNO

7

PQRS

8

TUV

9

WXYZ

0 #

Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used

(CD, USB or SD card).

256

MEDIA


Press the MEDIA button. Press the

MEDIA button again or select Media

Menu and press OK to con fi rm.

Select "Jukebox management" then

"Add fi les" and press OK at each step to con fi rm.

Add fi les


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Add fi les from MP3-Disc" for example and press OK to validate.

Add fi les from MP3-Disc


1

SETUP

* 0

#

Select the tracks required then "Rip selection" or select all of the tracks using

"Rip all".

RADIO MEDIA NAV TRAFFIC SETUP

1

4

GHI

5

JKL

6

MNO

*

0 #

Select "[New folder]" to create a new folder or select an existing folder

(created previously).

[New folder]

"Do you want to change the names of the tracks that will be ripped?": select "Yes" to change them or "No".

Yes No


1

SETUP

* 0 #


1

SETUP

* 0 #

To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real time ripping", "Fast ripping"/"High quality

(192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard quality

(128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start ripping".


1

SETUP

* 0

#

Con fi rm the warning message by pressing "OK" to start the copy.

OK

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0

#


JUKEBOX

RENAMING OR DELETING AN

ALBUM

Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able to rename or delete a track/folder.

Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox

(CD, radio, etc...).

LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX

MEDIA


Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to con fi rm.


MEDIA


Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to con fi rm.

Press the MEDIA button again or select Media Menu and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Select "Jukebox management" and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #



1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Play options" and press OK to con fi rm.

Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists" then press OK to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Modify content" and press

OK con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0

#

Press the ESC button to return to the fi rst fi le level.

Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.

Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists" play mode must then be selected.

257

258


VIEWING A VIDEO DVD

Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins automatically.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

4

GHI

2

ABC

5

JKL

3

DEF

6

MNO

7

PQRS

8

TUV

9

WXYZ

* 0 #

USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)

AUDIO / VIDEO / RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to the RCA sockets (white and red for audio; yellow for video) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

If the DVD does not appear on the screen, press the MODE button to gain access to the "MEDIA" screen which displays the DVD screen.

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button to gain access to the DVD menu at any time, or to the functions of the Media Menu which adjust the video (brightness/ contrast, image format...).


The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the or button.

Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device (AV)").

Press OK to con fi rm. Play begins.


MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button then press it again or select the Media Menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux) management" to activate it.

Select "Select media" then "External device (AV)" and press OK to activate it.

External device


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select the AUX music source and press OK to con fi rm. Play begins automatically.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

The display and management of the controls is via the portable device.

08 USING THE TELEPHONE

CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

To activate the Bluetooth telephone or the internal telephone, press PICK UP.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

Select Phone menu, then "Select phone" then choose between

"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth phone" or "Use internal phone". Press

OK at each step to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.

In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth telephone.

259

260


PAIRING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE /

FIRST CONNECTION

y g on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect

Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).

* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to.

Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered is displayed on the screen of the system.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect

Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .

Press the CALL button.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

To pair another telephone, press the

TEL button, then select Phone menu, then "Select phone" then "Connect

Bluetooth phone" then select the telephone required.

Press OK at each step to con fi rm.


1

SETUP

* 0 #


1

SETUP

*

0 #

If no telephone has been paired, the system prompts you to "Connect phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to con fi rm.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

*

0 #

Select "Search phone" and press OK to con fi rm. Then select the name of the telephone.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

Pairing can be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone instructions).

To delete a pairing, press TEL, select "Connect phone" then "Delete pairing".


CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE

* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the

SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from dealers.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect

Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect

Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is visible to all.

Press the PICK UP button.


1

SETUP

* 0 #

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.

261

262


USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE

WITH A SIM CARD

If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's audio system.

Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.

Install the SIM card in the holder and then insert it in the slot.

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must be carried out when stationary.

1 2

ABC

3

DEF

Enter the PIN code on the keypad then select OK and con fi rm.

* 0 #

Remember PIN

NAV TRAFFIC SETUP

7 7

When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it is used subsequently.

The system asks "Do you want to switch to the internal phone?", select "Yes" if you wish to use your

SIM card for your personal calls.

Otherwise, only the emergency call and the services will use the SIM card.


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

*

0 #

Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise the address book and the call list.

This synchronisation may take a few minutes.


RECEIVING A CALL

Operating the telephone while driving is prohibited. It is recommended that you park safely or use in preference the steering mounted controls.

MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" to refuse and con fi rm by pressing OK.

Yes No


ADDR

BOOK

SETUP

1

* 0 #

The PICK UP button accepts, the HANG UP button rejects the incoming call.

To hang up, press the HANG UP button or press OK and select "End call" then con fi rm by pressing OK.

End call


1

SETUP

*

0 #

Press the end of the steering mounted control to accept the call or end the call in progress.

Press the PICK UP button.


1

SETUP

*

0 #

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under Phone menu. You can select a number and press

OK to make the call.

Select the Phone menu function and press OK to con fi rm.

Phone menu

RADIO MEDIA

NAV TRAFFIC

1

SETUP

* 0 #

Select "Dial number", then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.

Dial number


1

SETUP

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select "Dial from address book". The Peugeot Connect Media can record up to 4 096 entries.

* 0 #

Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two seconds to open the address book.

It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.

263

09 SCREEN MENU MAP

1

MAIN FUNCTION

2

OPTION A

3 option A1

3 option A2

2

OPTION B...

4

Within 6 miles (10 km)

4


2

Read out settings

3

On con fi rmation

3

Incoming messages

2

TMC station information

1

TRAFFIC

"Traffic" Menu

2

Select preferred list

3

Messages on route

3

Only warnings on route

3

All warning messages

3

All messages

3

Geo. Filter

4

Deactivate PIN

4


4


264

MEDIA

1

"Media" Menu

2

Select media

3

3

Jukebox (Folders & Files)

3

SD-Card

3

USB

3

External device (audio/AV)

2

Jukebox management

3

Add fi les

3

Create folder

3

Modify content

3

Edit playlist

3

Play options

4

Folders & Files

4

Playlists

3

Memory capacity

2

Sound settings

3

Refer to the "Sound settings" menu details of which are shown on the next page.

2

Video settings

3

Aspect ratio

3

Menu language

3

Display

4

Brightness

4

Contrast

4

Colour

3

AUX standard

3

Reset video settings

2

Ext. Device (Aux) management

3

Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV)

1

RADIO

"Radio" Menu

2

Waveband

3

FM

3

AM

2

Manual tune

2

Sound settings

3

Refer to the "Sound settings" menu below.

1

"Sound settings" Menu

2

Balance/Fader

2

Bass/Treble

2

Equalizer

3

Linear

3

Classic

3

Jazz

3

Rock/Pop

3

Techno

3

Vocal

2

Mute rear speakers

2

Loudness

2

Speed dependent volume

2

Reset sound settings

1

NAV

"Navigation" Menu

2

Abort guidance/Resume guidance

2

Destination input

3

Address input

4

Country

4

City

4

Street

4

House number

4

Start route guidance

4

Postal code

4

Save to address book

4

Intersection

4

City district

4

Geo position

4

Map

3

Navigate HOME

3

Choose from last destinations

3

Choose from address book

2

Stopovers

3

Add stopover

4

Address input

4

Navigate HOME

4

Choose from address book

4

Choose from last destinations

3

Rearrange route

3

Replace stopover

3

Delete stopover

265

3

Recalculate

4

Fast route

4

Short route

4

Optimized route

2

POI search

3

POI nearby

3

POI near destination

3

POI in city

3

POI in country

3

POI near route

2

Route options

3

Route type

4

POI near destination

4

Short route

4

Optimized route

4

Subscr. service

2

Settings

3

Route dynamics

4

Traf fi c independent

266

4

Semi-dynamic

4

Dynamic

3

Avoidance criteria

4

Avoid motorways

4

Avoid toll roads

4

Avoid tunnels

4

Avoid ferries

3

Recalculate

ADDR

BOOK

1

"Address book" Menu

2

Create new entry

2

Show memory status

2

Export address book

2

Delete all voice entries

2

Delete all entries

2

Delete folder "My Addresses"

1

"Phone" menu

2

Dial number

2

Dial from address book

2

Call lists

2

Messages

2

Select phone

3

Telephone off

3

Use Bluetooth phone

3

Use internal phone

3

Connect Bluetooth phone

4

Search phone

5

Disconnect phone

5

Rename phone

5

Delete pairing

5

Delete all pairings

5

Show details

2

Settings

3

Automatic answering system

3

Select ring tone

3

Phone/Ring tone volume

3

Enter mailbox number

3

Internal phone settings

3

Automatically accept call

3

Signal waiting call (?)

3

Show status

3

Activate waiting call

3

Deactivate waiting call

3

Call forward (?)

3

Show status

3

Activate call forward

3

Deactivate call forward

3

Suppress own number

3

Select network

3

Set network automatically

3

Set network manually

3

Search for networks

3

PIN settings

3

Change PIN

4

Activate PIN

4

Deactivate PIN

3

Remember PIN

3

SIM-card memory status

SETUP

1

"SETUP" Menu

2

Language & Speech

3

Menu language

4

Deutsch

4

English

4

Español

4

Français

4

Italiano

4

Nederlands

4

Polski

4

Portuguese

3

Voice control

4

Voice control active

4

Tutorial

5

Basics

5

Examples

5

Tips

4

Speaker adaptation

5

New speaker adaptation

5

Delete speaker adaptation

3

Voice output volume

2

Date & Time

3

Set date & time

3

Date format

3

Time format

267

2

Display

3

Brightness

3

Colour

4

Steel

4

blue light (only in day mode)

4

Orange Ray

4

Blue Flame

3

Map colour

4

Day mode for map

4

Night mode for map

4

Auto. Day/Night for map

2

Units

3

Temperature

4

Celsius

4

Fahrenheit

3

Metric/Imperial

4 km

4

Miles

2

System

3

Factory reset

3

Software version

3

Automatic scrolling

268

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTION

There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).

ANSWER

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,

Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,

CD...).

SOLUTION

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear

Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.

The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.

- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.

- Check the content in the case of a recorded

CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.

- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.

- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded

CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is poor.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.

Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.

269

QUESTION ANSWER

The stored stations do not function (no sound,

87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

An incorrect waveband is selected.

SOLUTION

Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then

"Waveband" to return to the waveband on which the stations are stored.

The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function

(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.

Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.

Sound cut-outs of 1 to

2 seconds in radio mode.

During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.

Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.

270

QUESTION

"TA" is selected.

However, certain traf fi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

ANSWER

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traf fi c information.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traf fi c information.

SOLUTION

Wait until the traf fi c information is being received correctly (displaying of the traf fi c information symbols on the map).

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traf fi c information available.

The time taken to calculate a route sometimes seems longer than usual.

The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being calculated.

The "Risk areas" audible warning does not work.

The audible warning is not active.

Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop the copying before starting the guidance function.

Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,

Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.

The alert volume is set to minimum. Increase the volume of the alert when passing a

"Risk area".

Does the emergency call function work without a

SIM card?

No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order to make an emergency call.

The altitude is not displayed.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least

4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverage").

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the conditions of reception of the

GPS signal.

271

QUESTION

The route calculation is not successful.

ANSWER

The exclusion criteria may con fl ict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).

SOLUTION

Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation

Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").

There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD.

When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

This phenomenon is normal.

I cannot connect my

Bluetooth telephone.

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment may not be visible.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on.

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.

The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.

The system does not play the DVD.

The region protection may not be compatible.

I cannot copy the CD to the Jukebox.

The wrong source is selected.

The CD is copy-protected.

A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is available from the dealer network.

Increase the volume of the Peugeot Connect

Media Navigation (NG4 3D), to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Insert DVDs which have compatible region protection.

Change the active source to CD.

It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.

272

QUESTION

The system does not receive SMS.

ANSWER

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system.

SOLUTION

Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.

The SIM card used is a twin card.

Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.

I cannot update the risk area POIs.

The voice frequencies

(DTMF) are not active when I am communicating and I press numbers on the keypad.

The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed.

An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure.

Check that the medium used for the update (SD card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.

- Start the procedure again in full.

- Consult a PEUGEOT dealer if the problem persists.

- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is supplied by an of fi cial partner of PEUGEOT.

The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display is in telephone mode.

To activate them, press the MODE button until the telephone is displayed on the screen.

An risk area which does not concern me is displayed on the screen.

The risk areas are displayed near a point de fi ned on the map and in relation to a direction of travel.

The alert may be triggered when travelling under a road or near a road which is a Risk area.

273

274

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off following the activation of the energy economy mode. t onnect N

SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM

CONTENTS

01 First steps - Control panel

02 Steering mounted controls

03 General operation

04 Navigation - Guidance

05 Traffic information

06 Using the telephone

07 Radio

08 Music media players

09 Audio settings

10 Configuration


Frequently asked questions p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

276

278

279

281

294

297

307

310

316

317

318

p.

322

275

276

01 FIRST STEPS

Long press: open the "

Access to the " RADIO

Audio settings

" menu and display the list of stations received.

Long press: display the audio settings screen for the radio tuner source.

" menu: music ambience, bass, treble, loudness, left/right balance, front/rear fader, automatic volume adjustment.

Access to the " MUSIC " menu, and display of the

CD/MP3/Apple ® tracks and folders.

Long press: display the audio settings screen for the

" MEDIA (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/AUX)" sources.

Selection and con fi rmation OK dial:

Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a menu, then con fi rmation with a short press.

Other than for menus and lists, a short press displays a contextual menu depending on the current screen.

Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale in and out.

Short press without the engine running: on / off.

Short press with the engine running: audio source off / restore.

Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including TA messages and navigation instructions).

Short press: select pre-set radio station.

Long press: pre-set the current station.

MODE button: Selection of the type of permanent display.

Long press: black screen

(DARK).

Access to the " Navigation guidance " menu and display the recent destinations.

01 FIRST STEPS

Open the

" Con fi guration " menu.

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the navigation demonstration mode.

Open the " Telephone " menu and display the list of recent calls or accept an incoming call.

Select: by step selection of the previous/ next radio frequency.

- the previous / next MP3 folder.

Move up/down, in " Move the map " mode.

Continuous press: reinitialisation of the system.

Open the " Traf fi c information " menu and display the current traf fi c alerts.

Abandon the current operation, up one level in the menu.

Long press: return to the permanent display.

Select:

- the next lower / higher radio frequency automatically.

previous track or media. left / right of the screen when a menu is displayed.

Move left / right in " Move the map " mode.

277

278

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

RADIO: select the previous/next preset station.

Select the next entry in the address book.

RADIO: change to the next radio station in the list.

Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency.

CD: select the next track.

CD: continuous press: fast forward play.

Volume increase.

RADIO: change to the previous radio station in the list.

Long press: automatic search for a lower frequency.

CD: select the previous track.

CD: continuous press: fast reverse.

Change the audio source.

Start a call from the address book.

Call/End call on the telephone.

Press for more than 2 seconds: access to the address book.

Volume decrease.


Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons.


Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:

" RADIO "

" TELEPHONE "

(If conversation in progress)

SETUP : PARAMETERS date and time, display con fi guration, sound.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth

(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.

" MAP IN WINDOW "

(If navigation guidance in progress)

" FULL SCREEN MAP "

Changing the audio source:

RADIO : RADIO broadcasts.

MUSIC : playing MUSIC.

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the

"Screen menu map" section.

279


DISPLAY ACCORDING TO CONTEXT

A press on the dial gives access to short-cut menus according to the display in the screen.

1

RADIO:

Activate / Deactivate TA

1

Activate / Deactivate RDS

1

Change waveband

1

TA

2

FM

2

AM

280

TELEPHONE (call in progress):

1

Private mode

1

Put call on hold

1

DTMF ring tones

1

Hang up

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,

CD or USB (according to media):

Play modes:

1

Normal

1

Random

1

Random on all media

1

Repetition

FULL SCREEN MAP OR IN A

NEW WINDOW:

1

Stop / Restore guidance

1

Select destination

2

Enter an address

2

Directory

2

GPS coordinates

1

Divert route

1

Move the map

2

Info. on location

2

Select as destination

2

Select as stage

2

Save this place (contacts)

2

Quit map mode

1

Guidance criteria


Access to the "NAVIGATION" menu

"""""""""""" g """"""""""""

Press NAV .

A short press on the end of the lighting control stalk repeats the last navigation message.

To delete the list of recent destinations, select " Guidance options " in the navigation menu then select " Delete last destinations " and con fi rm. Select " Yes " then con fi rm.

Deleting just one destination is not possible.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for mapping updates.

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

or

281

282


SELECTING A DESTINATION

Selection the town from the list offered, then con fi rm .

A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed directly by selecting and con fi rming " List t " on the screen.

TOWARDS A NEW DESTINATION

Turn the dial and select " OK " then con fi rm.

Press NAV to display the

" Navigation - guidance " menu.

Select " Select destination " and con fi rm, then select " Enter an address " and con fi rm.

If possible, enter the " Road " and

" N°/X " information in the same way.

Select the " Country " function then con fi rm.

Select " Archive " to save the address entered in a contact fi le.

The system allows up to 400 contact fi les to be recorded.

Select " Town " function then con fi rm to enter the destination town.

Select the letters in the name of the town one at a time, con fi rming each one with the dial.

Con fi rm " OK " to start guidance.

Select the guidance criteria: " Fastest route ", " Shortest route " or optimised

" Distance/Time ", then select the desired restriction criteria: " With tolls ",

" With Ferry ", or " Traf fi c info " then con fi rm " OK ".


TO ONE OF THE RECENT DESTINATIONS



TOWARDS A CONTACT IN THE CONTACTS DIRECTORY

Navigation towards a contact imported from your telephone is only possible if the address is compatible with the system.

Select the desired destination and con fi rm to start guidance.



Select " Select destination " and con fi rm, then select " Directory " and con fi rm.

Selection the desired destination from your contacts and con fi rm " OK " to start the guidance.

283

284


TOWARDS GPS COORDINATES



TOWARDS A POINT ON THE MAP

With the map displayed, press OK to display the contextual menu. Select

" Move the map " and con fi rm.

Move the cursor using the control to identify the desired destination.

Select " Select destination " and con fi rm, then select " GPS coordinates " and con fi rm.

Enter the GPS coordinates and con fi rm

" OK " to start the guidance.

Press OK to display the contextual menu for " Move the map " mode.

Select " Select as destination " or

" Select as stage " and con fi rm.


TOWARDS POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)



The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity

(hotels, various businesses, airports...).

Select " Search by Name " to search for POIs by name and not by proximity.

Select the " Enter an address " function and con fi rm, then select Select destination and con fi rm.

To select a POI close to your current location, select " POI " and con fi rm, then select " Around the current place " and con fi rm.

To select a POI as a stage on the route, select " POI " and con fi rm, then select

" On the route " and con fi rm.

To select a POI as a destination, fi rst enter the country and town (see "Towards a new destination"), select " POI " and con fi rm, fi nally select " r " and con fi rm.

Search for POIs in the categories suggested in the following pages.

Select the POI and con fi rm " OK " to start the guidance.

285

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE This icon appears when several POIs are grouped together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

The detailed procedure for updating POIs can be found at "http://peugeot.navigation.com".

286

* According to availability in the country.


ALERT PARAMETERS

RISK AREAS

Press NAV to display the " Navigation - guidance " menu.

These functions are only available if risk areas have been downloaded and installed on the system.

The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at www.peugeot.com.

Select " Guidance options " and con fi rm, then select " Set parameters for risk areas " and con fi rm.

Select:

- "Visual alert"

- "Audible alert"

- "Alert only in guidance"

- "Overspeed alarm only".

The choice of time of noti fi cation de fi nes how long in advance that Risk area warnings are given.

Select " OK " to con fi rm the screen.

287

288

04

ADDING A STAGE



Select " Journey leg and route " then con fi rm.

Select " Add a stage " then con fi rm .

The address of the stage is entered as a destination, by " Enter an address ", a contact in " Directory ", or " Previous destinations ".

Select " Close to " a route passing close to the stage or " Strict " for a route passing through the stage.

Con fi rm " OK " to start the guidance, and give a general indication of the guidance route.

ORGANISING STAGES

To organise stages, carry out operations 1 to 2 again, then select " Order/delete journey legs " and con fi rm.

Select the stage that you want to move in the order.

Select and con fi rm to save the modi fi cations.

Select " Delete " to delete the stage.


ROUTE OPTIONS

CALCULATION CRITERIA



Select " De fi ne calculation criteria " and con fi rm.

This function allows modi fi cation of:

- the Fastest route ", " Shortest route ",

" Distance/Time "),

- the exclusion criteria: (" With tolls " or " With Ferry "),

- traf fi c avoidance: (" Traf fi c info ").

If traf fi c avoidance (Traf fi c info) is selected, the system suggests an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.

Select " Guidance options " and con fi rm.

Select " OK " and con fi rm to save the modi fi cations.

289

290


MAP MANAGEMENT

SELECTING THE POINTS OF INTEREST DISPLAYED ON THE MAP



Select from the various categories the ones that you want to display on the screen.

Select " Map management " and con fi rm.

Select " Map details " and con fi rm.

Select " By default " to have only " Oil stations, garages " and

" Accident-prone area " appear on the map (if installed in the system).

Select " OK " then con fi rm and select

" OK " again then con fi rm to save the modi fi cations.

04

MAP ORIENTATION



Select " Map management " and con fi rm.

Select " Map orientation " and con fi rm.

Select:

- " Vehicle direction " to have the map follow the direction of travel,

- " North direction " to keep the map always North up,

- " Perspective view " to display a perspective view.

The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is con fi gured in the " SETUP " menu.

Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.

291

292


ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE SPEECH SYNTHESIS

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME/DEACTIVATION

The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via the

" SETUP " / " Voice synthesis " menu.

The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission of the message using the volume adjustment control.

Select the volume graph and con fi rm.



Adjust the volume to the desired level and con fi rm.

Select " Deactivate " to deactivate voice messages. Select " Guidance options " and con fi rm.

Select " Set speech synthesis " and con fi rm.

Select " OK " and press the dial to con fi rm.

04

MALE VOICE / FEMALE VOICE

Press SETUP to display the con fi guration menu.

Select " Voice synthesis " and con fi rm.

Select " Select male voice " or " Select female voice " then con system restarts. fi rm " Yes " to activate a male or female voice. The

293

294


Access to the "TRAFFIC INFORMATION" menu

""""""" Traf fi c information """""""

Press " TRAFFIC ".


or


CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES

TMC (Traf fi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traf fi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.

The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traf fi c problem.

Press the TRAFFIC button to display the

Traf fi c information menu.

The system offers a choice of:

- " ", or

" Retain the messages "

● " Around the vehicle ", (con fi rm the mileage to modify and select the distance),

● " ".

Select the " Geographic fi lter r " function and con fi rm.

Con fi rm " OK " to save the modi fi cations.

We recommend:

- a fi lter on the route and

- a fi lter around the vehicle of:

295

296


PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:


The TA (Traf fi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traf fi c report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

Press RADIO to display the " FM / AM band " menu.

Red and yellow triangle: traf fi c information, for example:

Select " Guidance options " then con fi rm.

Activate or deactivate " TA " then con fi rm.

The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the transmission of this type of alert.

Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing the button.

During a message, press the button to interrupt it.


Access to the "TELEPHONE" menu

""""""" T l p h """""""

Press PHONE .

To make a call, select a number in the list and con fi rm " OK " to start the call.

Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of recent calls.

In the top bar of the permanent display

No telephone connected.

Telephone connected.

Incoming call.

Outgoing call.

Synchronisation of address book in progress.

Telephone call in progress.


or

297

298


PAIRING A BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE

FIRST CONNECTION

Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be carried out with the vehicle stationary .

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "shown to all" (telephone con fi guration).

Select " Peripherals search " and con fi rm.

The list of peripherals detected is displayed. Wait until the " Connect " button is available.

Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list of devices detected then select " Connect " and con fi rm.

Press this button.

Select " Bluetooth functions " and con fi rm.

The system offers to connect the telephone:

in " Hands-free mode " (telephone only),

in " Audio " mode (streaming: playing music fi les on the telephone),

- or " All " (for selection of both modes).

Select " OK " and con fi rm.


The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

The " Hands-free mode " should be used in preference if

"Streaming" is not desired.

Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is started.

The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.

Select a code for the connection then con fi rm " OK ".

Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.

On return to the vehicle,the last telephone connected automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).

To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.

Enter the same code on the telephone then accept the connection.

299

300


DIRECTORY / SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS

Press PHONE then select " Contacts management " and con fi rm.

Select " New contact " to enter a new contact.

Select " Sort by Name/First name " to choose the order in which they appear.

Select " Delete all contacts " to delete the contacts saved in the system.

Select " Import all the entries " to import all the contacts in the telephone and save them in the system.

Once imported, a contact remains visible whatever telephone is connected.

Selection " Synchronization options ": synchronization: only the contacts saved in the system

(always present).

- Display telephone contacts: only the contacts saved in the telephone.

- Display SIM card contacts: only the contacts saved on the SIM card.

- Display all phone contacts: contacts on the SIM card and in the telephone.

Select " Contact mem. status " to see the number of contacts saved in the system or imported, and the free memory.


MANAGING CONTACTS

Press PHONE then select " Directory of contacts " and con fi rm.

Select " Import " to copy one contact to the system.

Select the desired contact and con fi rm.

Select " Call " to start the call.

Select " Open " to view an external contact or modify a contact saved in the system.

It is necessary to import an external contact to modify the record.

It will be saved in the system. It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.

Select " Delete " to delete a contact saved in the system.

Select OK or press the back button to exit this menu.

301

302


MAKING A CALL

Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering mounted controls.

Press PHONE twice.

Select " Dial " then con fi rm.

Dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad selecting each number in turn.

Con fi rm " OK " to make the call.

Press TEL or twice on PHONE .

Select " Directory of contacts " then con fi rm.

Select the desired contact and con fi rm.

If access was via the PHONE button, select " Call " and con fi rm.

Select the number and con fi rm to start the call.


ENDING A CALL

CALLING A RECENTLY ENTERED NUMBER

Press PHONE then select " OK " to end the call.

Press TEL , select " Call list " and con fi rm, or press PHONE to display the calls log.

Or make a long press on TEL at the steering mounted controls.

Or make two short presses on TEL at the steering mounted controls.

Select the desired number and con fi rm.

To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select " Phone functions " and con fi rm then select " Delete calls log " and con fi rm.

Or press the MODE button, as many times as necessary, until the telephone screen is displayed.

Press " OK " to display the contextual menu then select " Hang up " and con fi rm.

303

304

06


An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the screen.

" Yes " to accept the call is selected by default.

Press " OK " to accept the call.

Select " No " and con fi rm to reject the call.

A short press on TEL accepts an incoming call.

A long press on TEL rejects an incoming call.


OPTIONS DURING A CALL *

During a call, press the MODE button several times to select display of the telephone screen, then press " OK " to open the contextual menu.

Or make a short press on this button.

Select " Private mode " and con fi rm to take the call on the handset.

Or select " Hands-free mode " and con fi rm to take the call via the vehicle's speakers.

Select " Put call on hold " and con fi rm to put the current call on hold.

Or select " Resume the call " and con fi rm to resume the call on hold.

* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.

Select " DTMF ring tones " to use the numerical keypad, so as to navigate through the menu of an interactive vocal server.

Select " Hang up " to end the call.

it is possible to hold a 3-way conference call by making 2 calls in succession*.

Select " Conference mode call " in the contextual menu accessible using this button.

305

306


MANAGING PAIRED TELEPHONES CHANGING THE RING TONE

Press PHONE twice.

Press PHONE twice.

Select " Phone functions " and con fi rm.

Select " Bluetooth functions ".

Select " List of the paired peripherals " and con fi rm.

It is possible to:

" Connect " or " Disconnect " the selected telephone,

- delete the pairing of the selected telephone.

It is also possible to select all pairings.

Select " Ring options " and con fi rm.

You can adjust the volume and the type of ring tone.

Select " OK " and con fi rm to save the changes.

07 RADIO

Access to the "RADIO" menu

"""""""" FM / AM band """"""""

Press RADIO .

Press or or use the rotary control to select the previous or next station in the list.


or

307

308

07 RADIO

CHANGING BAND SELECTING A STATION

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.

The quality of reception is represented by the number of active waves in this symbol.

Press RADIO or OK to display the contextual menu.

By alphabetical list

Press RADIO , select the station of your choice and con fi rm.

Select " Change waveband ".

By automatic frequency search

Press or for the automatic search for a lower or higher radio frequency.

Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering mounted controls.

Select " AM / FM " and con fi rm.

By manual frequency search

Press or to adjust the radio frequency step by step.

07 RADIO

PRESETTING A STATION

After selecting a station, press one of the buttons on the numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the current station.

An audible signal con fi rms that the station has been preset. preset station.

Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering mounted controls.

ACTIVATE / DEACTIVATE RDS

RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Press RADIO .

Select " Guidance options " then con fi rm.

Activate or deactivate " RDS " then con fi rm.

309

310

08

Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu

"""""""" MEDIA """"""""

Press MUSIC .

Go from the list to the menu (left/right). or

08

CD, MP3 CD / USB PLAYER


The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with ".wma, .aac, .

fl ac,

.ogg and .mp3" fi le extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.

It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

WMA fi les must be of the standard wma 9 type.

The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

The system supports USB mass storage or iPod devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).

If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the system, only the fi rst partition is recognised.

Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls.

The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,

999 tracks per folder.

If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds

500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and deactivates the port.

Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable

(not supplied).

In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16 or 32.

The system does not support the operation of an Apple ®

USB memory stick connected at the same time. player and a

It is recommended that of fi cial Apple ® USB cables are used to ensure correct operation.

311

312


SOURCES

Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB memory stick in the USB player or connect the

USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied) .

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the fi rst connection.

Reduce the number of non-music fi les and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.

The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. However, the system memorises these lists and if they are not modi fi ed, the loading time will be shorter.

Play starts automatically after a period which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.

SELECTION OF SOURCE

The SOURCE button on the steering mounted controls allows a direct change to the next media source.

" CD / CD MP3 "

" RADIO "

" USB, IPod "

" STREAMING " " AUX "

Press MUSIC to display the " MEDIA " menu.

Select " Following media source " and con fi rm.

Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either with SOURCE or RADIO ).


SELECTING A TRACK

Previous track.

Next track.

Previous folder.

Next folder.

Fast forward.

Fast backward.

Long press

Long press

/

/

/

/

Pause: long press on SRC .

MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks or folders

Up or down in the list.

Con fi rm, next menu level.

Up one menu level.

/

/

/

/

+ /

/

313

314


CONNECTING APPLE

®

PLAYERS AUDIO STREAMING

Connect the Apple ® supplied).

player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not

Play starts automatically. Streaming allows audio fi les on your telephone to be played via the vehicle's speakers.

Control is via the audio system.

Connect the telephone: see "USING THE TELEPHONE".

Select " Audio " or " All " pro fi le.

The classi fi cations available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).

The default classi fi cation used is by artist. To modify the classi fi cation used, return to the fi rst level of the menu then select the desired classi fi cation (playlists for example) and con fi rm to go down through the menu to the desired track.

The "Shuf fl e tracks" mode on an iPod mode on the audio system.

corresponds to the "Random"

The "Shuf fl e albums" mode on an iPod ® corresponds to the "Random all" on the audio system.

"Shuf fl e tracks" is restored by default on each connection.

If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone.

Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ® player.

The list of devices compatible with software versions is available from

PEUGEOT dealers.

Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source.

It is recommended that you activate " Repeat " on the Bluetooth peripheral.


USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)

JACK AUDIO/USB CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device

(MP3, WMA player…) to the

JACK auxiliary audio socket or

USB port using a suitable cable.

Select " Activate / Deactivate AUX input " and con fi rm.

First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

Press MUSIC to display the " MUSIC " menu.

Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

315

316

09 AUDIO SETTINGS

They are accessible by the MUSIC button in the control panel or by a long press on RADIO according to the source in use.

The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of listeners in the vehicle.

- " r " (choice of 6 musical ambiences)

- " "

- " "

" Loudness " (Activate/Deactivate)

" Distribution " (" Driver ", " All passengers ")

" Le-Ri balance " (Left/Right)

- " Fr-Re balance " (Front/Rear)

- " " depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)

The audio settings ( Equalizer , , Treble and Loudness ) are different and independent for each sound source.

The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.

10 CONFIGURATION

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

Press SETUP to display the

" Con fi guration " menu.

Select " Display con fi guration " and con fi rm.

Select " Choose colour " and con fi rm to select the screen colour harmony and the map presentation mode:

- day mode,

- night mode, day/night mode, according to whether the headlamps are on.

Select " Adjust luminosity " and con fi rm to adjust the screen brightness.

Press " OK " to save the changes.

The settings for day and night are independent.

317


MAIN FUNCTION

OPTION A

1 option A1

2

1

3 option A2

OPTION B...

"Navigation - guidance"

MENU

1

Select destination

2


2

Directory

2

GPS coordinates (Archive)

1

Journey leg and route

2

Add a stage

3


3

Directory

3

Previous destinations

2

Order/delete journey legs

2

Divert route

1

2

Chosen destination

Guidance options

2

Set speech synthesis

2

Delete last destinations

2

Set parameters for risk areas

1

Map management

2

Map orientation

2

Map details

2

Move the map

2

Mapping and updating

2

Description of risk areas database

1

Stop / Restore guidance

2

De fi ne calculation criteria

318

2

Fastest route

2

Shortest route

2

Distance/Time

2

With tolls

2

With Ferry

2

Traf fi c info


"TRAFFIC" MENU

1

Geographic filter

2

Retain all the messages

2

Retain the messages

3

Around the vehicle

3

On the route

1

Select TMC station

2

Automatic TMC

2

Manual TMC

2

List of TMC stations

1

Display / Do not display messages

Phone MENU

1

1

Dial

Directory of contacts

2

Call

2

Open

2

Import

2

Delete

1

2

Cancel

Contacts management

2

New contact

2

Sort by Name/First name

2

Delete all contacts

2

Import all the entries

2

Synchronization options

No synchronization

3

3

3

Display telephone contacts

3

Display SIM card contacts

Display all phone contacts

2

Contact mem. status

1

Phone functions

2

Ring options

1

2

Delete calls log

Bluetooth functions

2

List of the paired peripherals

3

Connect

3

Disconnect

3

Delete

1

2

2

3

3

Delete all

Cancel

Peripherals search

Rename radiotelephone

Hang up

319

320


"RADIO" MENU

1

1

Change Waveband

Guidance options

2

TA

1

2

RDS

Audio settings

2

Equalizer

3

None

3

Classical

3

Jazz

3

Rock

3

Techno

3

Vocal

2

Bass

2

Treble

2

Loudness

2

Distribution

Driver

3

All passengers

3

2

Le-Ri balance

2

Fr-Re balance

1

2

Auto. Volume

Update radio list

"MUSIC" MENU

1

Change Media

2

CD

2

BT Streaming

2

USB/iPod

1

1

2

AUX

Eject USB support

Read mode

2

Normal

2

Random

1

1

2

Random on all media

2

Repetition

Audio settings

Activate / Deactivate AUX input


"SETUP" MENU

1

Display configuration

2

Choose colour

3

Harmony

3

Cartography

4

Day mode

4

Night mode

4

Auto Day/Night

2

Adjust luminosity

2

Set date and time

2

Select units

1

Voice synthesis

2

Guidance instructions volume

2

Select male voice / Select female voice

1

Define vehicle parameters *

2

Parking assistance

2

Operation of wipers

3

Engage rear wiper in REVERSE

2

Lighting con fi guration

3

Duration of guide-me home lighting

3

Directional headlamps

3

Mood lighting

3

Daytime running lamps

1

Trip computer

2

Alert log

2

Status of functions

* The parameters vary according to the vehicle.

321


The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

QUESTION

The route calculation is not successful.

ANSWER

The guidance criteria may con fl ict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).

SOLUTION

Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation

Menu, "Guidance options"\ "De fi ne calculation criteria".

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected.

Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The risk areas audible warning does not work.

The POIs have not been downloaded. Download the POIs from the website:

"http://peugeot.navigation.com".

Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters for risk areas".

The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route.

The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. fi c info" function in the list of guidance criteria.

I receive a Risk area alert which is not on my route.

Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area located on nearby or parallel roads.

Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the time for the announcement.

322


QUESTION

Certain traf fi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

ANSWER

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traf fi c information.

The fi lters are too restrictive.

SOLUTION

Wait until the traf fi c information is being received correctly (display of the traf fi c information icons on the map).

Modify the "Geographic fi lter" settings.

The altitude is not displayed.

I cannot connect my

Bluetooth telephone.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traf fi c information.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traf fi c information available.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least

4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverage").

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on.

- Check in the telephone settings that it is

"visible to all".

The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.

A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is available from the dealer network.

The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.

Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

The ambient noise level has an in fl uence on the quality of telephone communication.

Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).

323


QUESTION

Some contacts are duplicated in the list.

ANSWER

The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

SOLUTION

Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".

Contacts are not shown in alphabetical order.

Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a speci fi c order.

Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.

The system does not receive

SMS text messages.

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system.

The CD is ejected automatically or is not. played by the player.


Le CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.





- The audio system's CD player does not play

DVDs.

- Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of the correct quality.

This phenomenon is normal. There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD or connection of a

USB memory stick.


When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.





324


QUESTION

Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.

ANSWER

The audio system does not display some types of characters.

SOLUTION

Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.

Playing of streaming fi les does not start.

The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play.

Start the playback from the device.

The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.

The Bluetooth pro fi le does not allow the transfer of this information.





I cannot fi nd some radio stations in the list of stations received.


The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.

The name of the radio station changes.

Some radio stations send other information in place of their name

(the title of the song for example).

The system interprets this information as the name of the station.

Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.


325


QUESTION

In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.

In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.

ANSWER

The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.

Modifying one without the other is not possible.

SOLUTION

Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.

When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.

When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.


The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.

Modifying one without the other is not possible.

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,

Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,

CD...).

Modify the balance or distribution settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.

Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the

AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,

Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the

"None", musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

326


QUESTION

With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.

ANSWER

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

SOLUTION


Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait

(around 2 to 3 minutes).

Some fi les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).

Delete the fi les supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the fi le structure on the memory stick.

When I connect my iPhone as telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music fi les.

When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple ® players.

Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the

USB function takes priority over streaming).

327

328

Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)

AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH

®

Your Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.

CONTENTS

01 First steps

02 Steering mounted controls

03 Main menu

04 Audio

05 Peugeot Connect USB

06 Bluetooth


Frequently asked questions p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p.

330

331

332

333

336

339

342

347

329

01 FIRST STEPS

Select source: radio, audio CD / MP3 CD, USB,

Jack connection, Streaming,

AUX.

Select wavebands

FM1, FM2, FMast and

AM.

Audio settings: front/ rear fader, left/right balance, bass/treble, loudness, audio ambiences.

Display the list of local stations.

Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders

(CD / USB).

Abandon the current operation.

Eject CD.

TA (Traf fi c Announcements) on/off.

Long press: PTY * (radio

Programme TYpe) mode.

Select the screen display mode:

Date, audio functions, trip computer, telephone.

Automatic frequency search down/up.

Select previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track.

On/off, volume setting.

The DARK button changes the screen display for improved driving comfort at night.

1 st press: upper bar only illuminated.

2 nd press: black screen.

3 rd press: return to standard display.

Buttons 1 to 6:

Select a pre-set radio station.

Long press: pre-set a station.

Con fi rm.

Display main menu.

Select next frequency down/up.

Select previous/next MP3 folder.

Select previous/next folder / genre / artist / playlist (USB).

* Available according to version.

330

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Radio: select the previous/next pre-set station.

USB: select genre / artist / folder from the classi fi cation list.

Select the previous/next item in a menu.

Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.

CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the next track.

CD / USB: continuous press: fast forwards play.

Move in the list.

Volume increase.

Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency.

CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the previous track.

CD / USB: continuous press: fast reverse.

Move in the list.

Change audio source.

Con fi rm a selection.

Call/end call on the telephone.

Press for more than 2 seconds: telephone main menu.

Volume decrease.


The sound is restored by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

331

03

> MONOCHROME SCREEN C

AUDIO FUNCTIONS : radio, CD, USB, options.

TELEPHONE :

Bluetooth hands-free, pairing, management of a call.

332

> MONOCHROME SCREEN A

TRIP COMPUTER : entering of distances, alerts, status of functions.

PERSONALISATION-

CONFIGURATION : vehicle parameters, display, languages.

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen menu map" in this section.

04 AUDIO

RADIO

SELECTING A STATION

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select the radio.

Press the BAND AST button to select a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.

Brie fl y press one of the buttons to carry out an automatic search of the radio stations.

Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up/down for radio frequencies.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of stations received locally (30 stations maximum).

To update this list, press for more than two seconds.

The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio system.

RDS

Press the MENU button.

Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then press OK.

Select the FM WAVEBAND

PREFERENCES function then press OK.

Select ACTIVATE RDS then press

OK. RDS appears on the screen.

In radio mode, press OK directly to activate/deactivate RDS mode.

The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.

333

334

04 AUDIO


The TA (Traf fi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traf fi c report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

Press the TA button to activate or deactivate traf fi c messages.

CD

PLAYING A CD

Insert circular compact discs only.

Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no re fl ection on the quality of the original player.

Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forwards or fast backwards.

04 AUDIO

MP3 CD

PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before play begins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played.

While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.

All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a folder on the CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.

MP3 CD


The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3, is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet fi le format is recommended.

If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording format is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible

(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is recommended.

The audio system will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le

(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.

Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

335

336

05

USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted from a portable device - digital player or a USB memory stick - to your Peugeot Connect Sound

(RD5) and heard via the vehicle's speakers.

USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple ® player of generation 5 or later:

- USB memory sticks should be formatted

FAT or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),

- navigation through the fi le database is also possible by means of the steering mounted controls.

Other Apple players of earlier generations and players using the MTP protocol * :

- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),

- navigation through the fi le database is from the portable device.

The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported are available from PEUGEOT dealers.

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB source is detected as soon as it is connected. Play begins automatically after a delay which depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.

The fi le formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec compression), .wav and .ogg.

Certain playlist formats are supported (.m3u, ...)

On reconnection of the previous memory stick used, play is resumed automatically with the last track played.

The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.

The other sources are available during this time.

The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or each time a USB memory stick is connected.

When connecting for the fi rst time, the classi fi cation suggested is by folder. When you reconnect, the classi fi cation selected previously is retained.

* According to vehicle.

05 USB PLAYER

USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

Press and hold LIST to display the different classi fi cations.

Select by Folder / Artist / Genre / Playlist, press OK to select the classi fi cation required, then press OK again to con fi rm.

- by Folder: all folders containing audio fi les recognised on the peripheral device.

- by Artist: all of the artist names de fi ned in the ID3 Tags, classi fi ed in alphabetical order.

- by Genre: all of the genres de fi ned in the ID3 Tags.

- by Playlist: in accordance with the playlists recorded on the USB device.

Press LIST brie fl y to display the previously selected classi fi cation.

Navigate through the list using the left/ right and up/down buttons.

Con fi rm the selection by pressing OK.

Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous / next track on the classi fi cation list currently being played.

Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.

Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous / next

Genre, Folder, Artist or Playlist on the classi fi cation list currently being played.

CONNECTING AN APPLE ® PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT

The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as de fi ned in the

Apple ® player).

Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.

Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.

337

338

05 USB PLAYER

USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)

JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle)

The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of a portable device (MP3 player...).

Do not connect a device to both the JACK socket and the USB port at the same time.

Connect the portable device

(MP3 player…) to the JACK socket or to the USB port, using a suitable cable (not supplied).

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF

THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX.

The display and control is via the portable device.

06 BLUETOOTH

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

SCREEN C

(Available according to model and version)

PAIRING A TELEPHONE / FIRST CONNECTION

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone con fi guration.

Press the MENU button.

In the menu, select:

- Bluetooth

Audio

- Bluetooth fi guration

- Perform a Bluetooth search

A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.

The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.

Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which services are available to you.

The fi rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.

The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions in particular: Directory * , Call list, Pairing management.

* If your telephone is fully compatible.

Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one telephone can be connected at a time.

A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.

Con fi rm by pressing OK.

A message is displayed in the screen of the telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same code on the telephone, then con fi rm with OK.

If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.

A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.

The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has been con fi gured.

The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period.

339

06 BLUETOOTH

340


An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the vehicle's screen.

Select the YES tab on the display using the buttons and con fi rm by pressing OK.

Press this button to accept the call.

MAKING A CALL

From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.

Press this button for more than two seconds for access to your directory, then navigate with the thumb wheel.

Or

To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, with the vehicle stationary.

ENDING A CALL

During a call, press this button for more than

2 seconds.

Con fi rm with OK to end the call.

06 BLUETOOTH

BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING *

Wireless transmission of the telephone's music fi les via the audio equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate

Bluetooth pro fi les (Pro fi les A2DP / AVRCP).

Initiate the pairing between the telephone and the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 9 on the previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with the key in the ignition.

Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function menu.

The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.

Activate the streaming source by pressing the SOURCE button ** .

The tracks to be played can be controlled as usual via the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls *** .

The contextual information can be displayed on the screen.

* Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.

** In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from the keypad.

*** If the telephone supports the function.

341

342


MONOCHROME A

1

MAIN FUNCTION

2

OPTION A

3

OPTION A1

3

OPTION A2

2

OPTION B...

1

RADIO-CD

2

RDS SEARCH

2

REG MODE

2

CD REPEAT

2

RANDOM PLAY

1

VEHICLE CONFIG *

2

REV WIPE ACT

2

GUIDE LAMPS

1

OPTIONS

2

DIAGNOSTICS

3

CONSULT

3

ABANDON

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.


1

UNITS

2

TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS / °FAHRENHEIT

2

FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L -

L/100 - MPG

1

DISPLAY ADJUST

2

YEAR

2

MONTH

2

DATE

2

HOUR

2

MINUTES

2

12 H/24 H MODE

1

LANGUAGE

2

FRANCAIS

2

ITALIANO

2

NEDERLANDS

2

PORTUGUES

2

PORTUGUES-BRASIL

2

DEUTSCH

2

ENGLISH

2

ESPANOL

343

344


MONOCHROME C

Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen:

RADIO

1

1

1 activate / deactivate RDS activate / deactivate REG mode activate / deactivate radiotext

CD / MP3 CD

1

1 activate / deactivate Intro activate / deactivate track repeat

(the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)

1 activate / deactivate random play

(the entire current CD for CD, the entire current folder for MP3 CD)

1

USB

activate / deactivate track repeat (of the current folder / artist / genre / playlist)

1 activate / deactivate random play (of the current folder / artist / genre / playlist)


MONOCHROME C

Pressing the MENU button displays:

1

AUDIO FUNCTIONS

2

FM BAND PREFERENCES

3 alternative frequencies (RDS)

4

activate / deactivate

3 regional mode (REG)

4


3 radio-text information (RDTXT)

4


2

PLAY MODES

3 album repeat (RPT)

4


3 track random play (RDM)

4


1

TRIP COMPUTER

2

ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION

3

Distance: x miles

2

ALERT LOG

3

Diagnostic s

2

STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS *

3

Functions activated or deactivated


345


1

PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION

2

DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *

2

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

3 video brightness adjustment

4 normal video

4 inverse video

4 brightness (- +) adjustment

3 date and time adjustment

4 day/month/year adjustment

4 hour/minute adjustment

4 choice of 12 h / 24 h mode

3 choice of units

4 l/100 km - mpg - km/l

4

°Celsius / °Fahrenheit

2

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE

346

1

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

2

BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION

3

Connect/Disconnect a device

3

Telephone function

3

Audio Streaming function

4

Consult the paired device

4

Delete a paired device

4

Perform a Bluetooth search

2

CALL

3

Calls list

4

Directory

2

MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL

3

Terminate the current call

3

Activate private mode



QUESTION


The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.

ANSWER SOLUTION

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,

Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).


The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear

Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.





- The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs.

- Due to their quality level, certain writeable

CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The message "USB peripheral error" is displayed on the screen.

The Bluetooth connection is cut.


The battery of the peripheral may not be suf fi ciently charged.

The USB memory stick is not recognised.

The memory stick may be corrupt.



Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.

Reformat the memory stick.



347

QUESTION ANSWER

The stored stations do not function (no sound,

87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

An incorrect waveband is selected.

SOLUTION

Press the BAND AST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored.

The traf fi c announcement

(TA) is displayed. I do not receive any traf fi c information.

The radio station is not part of the regional traf fi c information network.






Sound cut-outs of

1 to 2 seconds in radio mode.

During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency permitting better reception of the station.

Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traf fi c information.

Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.


Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the audio equipment switches off after a few minutes of use.

The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display.

When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.


In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.

Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.

348

A

Accessories ...........................216

Accessory socket,

12V ..................... 101, 103, 113

Accessory socket,

12 volt .........................108, 109

Access to the 3rd row ..............69

Adjusting headlamps ...............93

Adjusting head restraints ................65, 67

Adjusting seat belt height ......133

Adjusting the steering wheel .................73

Airbags ............................ 36, 116

Airbags, curtain..............139, 140

Airbags, front .................137, 140

Airbags, lateral...............139, 140

Air conditioning ........................25

Air conditioning, digital.......57, 60

Air conditioning, manual ............................57, 58

Air fi lter ..................................179

Air fl ow .....................................25

Air vents...................................56

Alarm .......................................79

Anti-pinch.........................81, 107

Anti-theft ..................................76

Armrest, rear ..........................109

Assistance call .......................228

Audible warning .....................129

Audio/video sockets...............258

Audio streaming

(Bluetooth) ..................314, 341

Audio systems .........................51

Automatic illumination of headlamps ..................89, 92

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps .....................129

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers ..........95, 97

Auxiliary socket..............315, 338

Auxiliary sockets ............258, 336

B

Backup starting ......................209

Battery ................... 179, 208-210

Battery, charging ....................209

Battery, remote control ......77, 78

Blind for panoramic sunroof ....107

Blinds ..................................... 114

Bluetooth (hands-free) .... 259-261,

298, 339

Bluetooth

(telephone) .......... 259-261, 298

Bonnet ...................................173

Bonnet stay............................173

Boot .........................................85

Boot lamp ...................... 100, 114

Brake discs ............................180

Brake lamps...........................199

Brake pads ............................180

Brakes ...................................180

C

Capacity, fuel tank ...................87

CD MP3 .................................335

Central locking ...................75, 84

Centre console ......................103

Changing a bulb ....196, 199, 200

Changing a fuse ....................201

Changing a wheel ..........190, 192

Changing a wiper blade.... 97, 211

Changing the date .......42, 44, 46

Changing the remote control battery ...................................77

Changing the time .......42, 44, 46

Checking levels .............177, 178

Checking the engine oil level ....40

Checking tyre pressures

(using the kit) ......................181

Checks...........175, 176, 179, 180

Child lock ...............................128

Children .................121, 125, 126

Child seats ............ 115, 116, 123

Child seats, conventional ................ 119, 121

Closing the boot.................75, 85

Closing the doors...............75, 83

Cold climate screen ...............215

Colour screen, retractable .......................49, 51

Concertina boards ...................70, 108, 109

Connectors, audio ...........102, 103, 336, 338

Control for panoramic sunroof blind .......................107

Coolant level ....................37, 178

Coolant temperature indicator ................................37

Courtesy lamps........................98

Courtesy mirror ......................102

Cruise control ........................155

Cup holder .............101, 108, 109

D

Date (setting) ...............42, 44, 46

Daytime running lamps .......91, 196, 198

Deactivating the passenger airbag ..........137

Deadlocking .............................75

Defrosting ....................58, 59, 72

Demisting.................................58

Dials and gauges .....................27

Diesel additive level ...............178

Dimensions ............................224

Dipped beam ...........89, 196, 197

Dipstick ............................40, 177

Directional lighting ..................................94

349

350

Direction indicators ............129, 196, 199

Distance alert.........................151

Doors .......................................83

Doors emergency control ........85

Door trays ..............................101

Dynamic emergency braking ................................144

Dynamic stability control

(DSC) ......................32, 35, 132

F

Filling with fuel ...................87, 88

Fitting a wheel .......................194

Fitting roof bars......................214

Fittings, boot ..................108, 109

Flashing indicators.................129

Foglamps, rear ........................90

Folding the rear seats ....67, 69, 70

Front foglamps.........90, 196, 198

Front seats...................63, 64, 66

Fuel..............................25, 87, 88

Fuel consumption ....................25

Fuel fi ller cap ...........................87

Fuel fi ller fl ap .....................87, 88

Fuel gauge...............................87

Fuel tank ............................87, 88

Fusebox, dashboard ..............201

Fuses .....................................201

E

Eco-driving ..............................25

Eco-driving (advice) .................25

Economical driving .................25

Economy mode...................... 211

Electric window controls ..........81

Electronic engine immobiliser ......................76, 78

Electronic stability control

(ESC) ..................................131

Emergency boot release..........86

Emergency call ..............228, 229

Emergency warning lamps ....129

Energy economy mode.......... 211

Engine, Diesel ........88, 174, 176,

219, 220, 223

Engine, petrol ....88, 175, 217, 218

Engine compartment .....175, 176

Engine compartment fusebox ...............................201

Engine oil level indicator ........................40, 177

Engines..........................217, 219

Environment ......................25, 78

ESC/ASR ...............................131

G

G.P.S. ............................242, 284

Gearbox, automatic ............162, 180, 210

Gearbox, electronic gear control .........158, 165, 180, 210

Gearbox, manual ....157, 165, 180

Gear lever ................................25

Gear lever, automatic gearbox ..............162

Gear lever, electronic gear control gearbox ...................158

Gear lever, manual gearbox ....157

Gear shift indicator ................157

Glove box ......................101, 102

Grab handles .........................101

Guidance ...............242, 282, 289

Guide-me-home.......................92

H

Halogen headlamps...............196

Hands-free kit ................298, 339

Hazard warning lamps ...........129

Head-up display.....149, 153, 155

Headlamp adjustment..............93

Headlamps, directional ....94, 196

Headlamp wash .......................96

Headlamp wash reservoir ......178

Head restraints, front ...............65

Head restraints, rear ................67

Heated seats ...........................65

Heating ........................25, 57, 58

Height and reach adjustment, steering wheel .......................73

High load retaining net........... 111

Hill start assist .......................146

Hooks ............................ 109, 113

Horn .......................................129

I

Identi fi cation plates ................225

Indicators, direction ...............129

Indicator lamps, status.......30, 31

In fl ating accessories

(using the kit) ......................181

In fl ating tyres ...........................25

Inputs for audio system ........258, 315, 336, 338

Instrument panel lighting .........41

Instrument panels ..............27, 28

Instrument panel screen ...........................27, 157

Intelligent Traction Control .....131

Interior fi ttings ........................101

Interior mood lighting ...............99

ISOFIX ...................................125

ISOFIX child seats ......... 124-126

ISOFIX mountings .................124

J

Jack ...............................190, 192

JACK socket ...103, 315, 336, 338

Jukebox (copy) ......................256

Jukebox (playing) ..................257

K

Keeping children safe ..... 115, 116, 125, 126, 137

Key with remote control ........... 74-76, 78

M

Main beam ............... 89, 196-198

Maintenance ............................25

Map reading lamps ..................98

Markings, identi fi cation ..........225

Mat.........................................104

Menu, main ............................332

Mini fuel level ...........................87

Mirror, rear view .......................73

Mirrors, door ............................72

Misfuel prevention ...................88

Modularity, seats ......................71

Motorway function

(direction indicators) ...........129

Mountings for ISOFIX seats ....124

MP3 CD .................................335

Multimedia, rear .............103, 106

Music media players ......254, 310

L

Labels, identi fi cation ..............225

Lamps, warning and indicator ....................29, 32, 33

LED daytime running lamps ....91

Level, brake fl uid ...................177

Level, headlamp wash .....96, 178

Level, power steering fl uid .....177

Levels and checks ......... 175-178

Lighting ..................................100

Lighting, guide-me home ....91, 92

Lighting, interior .................98, 99

Lighting bulbs

(replacement) ......196, 199, 200

Lighting control stalk ................89

Lighting dimmer .......................41

Loading ......................25, 71, 214

Load reduction mode ............. 211

Load space cover ...........108-110

Locating your vehicle ...............75

Locking from the inside............84

Long objects, transporting ....66, 71

Luggage retaining net ............ 112

N

O

Navigation..............242, 281, 282

Net ......................................... 110

Number plate lamps ..............200

Oil fi lter ..................................179

Oil level ............................40, 177

Opening the bonnet ...............173

Opening the boot ...............74, 85

Opening the doors .............74, 83

Opening the panoramic sunroof blind .......................107

Opening the retractable screen ...........51

Operation indicator lamps ....29, 32

P

Paint colour code ...................225

Panoramic glass sunroof .......107

Parking brake ........................180

Parking brake, electric ...141, 144

Parking sensors, rear ............168

Parking space sensor ...........170

Particle emission fi lter....178, 179

Passenger compartment fi lter ...............179

PEUGEOT call button ............229

PEUGEOT CONNECT

ASSISTANCE .....................228

Peugeot Connect Media

Navigation

(NG4 3D) ....231, 234, 237, 264

Peugeot Connect Navigation

(RT6) .............................49, 275

PEUGEOT CONNECT

SOS ............................228, 229

Peugeot Connect Sound

(RD5) ............46, 329, 342, 344

PEUGEOT services ...............229

PIN code ................................262

Player, CD MP3 .....................335

POIs (updating) .....................249

Port, USB.......103, 315, 336, 338

Priming the fuel system .........174

Protecting children ........ 115, 116,

121, 124-126, 137

Puncture ........................181, 187

R

Radio .............253, 307, 308, 333

RCA sockets ..........................258

Reading lamps, rear ................98

Rear foglamp .................199, 200

Rear screen (demisting) ....59, 72

351

352

Recharging the battery ..........209

Reduction of electrical load .... 211

Regeneration of the particle emissions fi lter ....................179

Reinitialising the electric windows ................................81

Reinitialising the remote control .................77

Remote control ............74, 75, 78

Removable screen

(snow shield) .......................215

Removing a wheel .................194

Removing the mat .................104

Repair kit, puncture .......181, 187

Replacing bulbs .....196, 199, 200

Replacing fuses .....................201

Replacing the air fi lter ............179

Replacing the oil fi lter ............179

Replacing the passenger compartment fi lter ...............179

Replacing wiper blades .... 97, 211

Resetting the service indicator ..............39

Resetting the trip recorder .......41

Rev counter .............................27

Reversing lamp......................199

Rigid panel...............................69

Risk areas (update) .......249, 286

Roof bars ...............................214

Routine checks ..............179, 180

Running out of fuel (Diesel) ....174

S

Safety for children....81, 121, 128

Screen, colour 16/9 .......237, 264

Screen, colour and mapping ....279, 318

Screen, monochrome .......332, 342, 344

Screen, monochrome C...........53

Screen, multifunction (with audio equipment) ..........44, 46, 49, 51

Screen, multifunction

(without audio equipment) ....42

Screen-wash reservoir...........178

Screen menu map ...264, 318, 342, 344

Screenwash, front....................96

Screenwash fl uid level .....96, 178

Seat adjustment...........63, 64, 67

Seat belts.......109, 133, 134, 136

Seat con fi gurations ..................71

Seats, electric ..........................64

Seats, rear ...................67, 69, 70

Serial number, vehicle ...........225

Service indicator ......................38

Servicing ..................................25

Setting the clock ..........42, 44, 46

Short-cut menus ............238, 280

Sidelamps .......... 89, 91, 196-199

Side repeater .........................198

SIM card ........................102, 262

Spare wheel...................190, 192

Spectacles storage ................101

Speed limiter..........................153

Speedometer ...........................27

Spotlamps, side .......................99

Start .......................................209

Starting the vehicle ....76, 158, 162

Steering mounted controls, audio ...........................236, 331

Stopping the vehicle ...76, 158, 162

Stop & Start ................55, 59, 62,

87, 165, 173, 179, 208

Storage ...101, 103, 105, 108, 109

Storage box ...........................102

Storage drawer ......................105

Storage wells .................108, 109

Stowing rings .................108, 109

Sun visor................ 101, 102, 114

Synchronising the remote control .................77

Synthesiser, voice..................292

System, navigation ........242, 282

T

Table of weights .....218, 220, 223

Tables, aircraft .......................105

Tables of engines...........217, 219

Tables of fuses.......................201

Tank, fuel .................................88

Technical data........ 217-220, 223

Telephone ............. 229, 259-261,

298, 302

Telephone, hands-free ................... 259-261

Temperature, coolant ..................................37

Temperature control for heated seats .........................65

Temporary tyre repair kit ........181

Third brake lamp....................200

TMC (Traf fi c info) ...........251, 295

Tools ..............................190, 192

Torch .............. 100, 108, 109, 114

Total distance recorder ............41

Towbar ...................................213

Towed loads...........218, 220, 223

Towing another vehicle ..........212

Traction control

(ASR) ..............................32, 35

Traf fi c information

(TA) .............252, 296, 309, 334

Traf fi c information

(TMC) ..........251, 252, 295, 296

Trailer ....................................213

Trip computer ..............52, 53, 55

Trip distance recorder ..............41

Tyre pressures .......................225

Tyres ........................................25

Tyre under-in fl ation detection .............................130

U

Under-in fl ation (detection) .....130

Under fl oor storage ................ 113

Unlocking .................................74

Unlocking from the inside ........84

Update risk areas ..........249, 286

Updating POIs .......................249

USB

(Peugeot Connect) ......103, 336

V

Vehicle identi fi cation ..............225

Ventilation .......................... 56-58

Voice commands ...................234

W

Warning lamps .............30, 31, 34

Wash-wipe, rear ......................96

Weights ..................218, 220, 223

Welcome lighting ...............91, 99

Window controls ......................81

Wiper, rear ...............................96

Wiper control stalk ............. 95-97

Wipers ...............................95, 97

X

Xenon headlamps..................196

353

EXTERIOR

Remote control key..................74-78

- opening / closing

- anti-theft protection

- starting

- battery

Fuel tank ..................................87-88

Misfuel prevention ........................ 88

Wiper .......................................95-97

Changing a wiper blade ........ 97, 211

Boot .........................................85-86

- opening / closing

- emergency release

Temporary puncture repair kit ............................181-189

Changing a wheel ................190-195

- tools

- removing

Parking sensors ...................168-169

Towing .................................212-213

Towbar .................................213-214

Changing rear bulbs ............199-200

- rear lamps

- 3rd brake lamp

- number plate lamps

- foglamps

Accessories ................................ 216

Roof bars, fi nishers..................... 214

Panoramic sunroof ..................... 107

Door mirrors .................................. 72

Exterior welcome lighting.............. 91

Door mirror spotlamps .................. 99

Lighting, automatic, directional ..............................89-94

Headlamp height adjustment ........ 93

Very cold climate screen............. 215

Changing bulbs....................196-198

- front lamps

- foglamps

- direction indicator repeaters

Parking space sensors ........170-171

Doors .......................................83-86

- opening / closing

- central locking

- emergency control

Alarm .......................................79-80

Electric windows ......................81-82

ESC: ABS, EBFD, EBA, ASR,

DSC ..................................131-132

CTI (traction on snow) ................ 131

Tyre under-in fl ation detection ..... 130

Tyre pressures ............................ 225

INTERIOR

Side blinds .................................. 114

Conventional child seats...... 115-123

ISOFIX child seats ...............124-127

Child lock .................................... 128

Front seats...............................63-65

- manual

- electric

- head restraints

- lumbar

- heated

Seat in table position, transporting long objects ............ 66

Boot fi ttings .......................... 108-113

- load space roller cover

- high load retaining net

- luggage retaining net

- hooks

- 12 V accessory socket

- storage box

Boot lamp, torch ................. 100, 114

Airbags ................................137-140

Deactivating the passenger's front airbag ................ 115-118, 138

Mats ............................................ 104

Storage drawer ........................... 105

Rear multimedia ......................... 106

Rear seats, 2nd row ................67-68

Rigid panel.................................... 69

Access to the 3rd row ................... 69

Rear seats, 3rd row .................70-71

Aircraft style table ....................... 105

Storage compartments under the footwells ... 105

Seat belts.............................133-136

355

356


Courtesy lamps....................... 98, 99

Seat belt / passenger's front airbag warning lamps display ...... 134, 138

Rear view mirror ........................... 73

Sun visor..................................... 102

Dashboard fuses .................201-204

Opening the bonnet .................... 173

Peugeot Connect Media navigation (RT6) ...231-273

Setting the date/time ...49-50

Peugeot Connect

Navigation (RT6) .....275-327

Setting the date/time ......49-50

Peugeot Connect

Sound (RD5) .........329-348

Setting the date/time .................. 44, 46

Ventilation ................................56-57

Rear ventilation............................. 57

Manual air conditioning............58-59

Digital air conditioning .............60-62

Demist/defrost .............................. 59

Interior fi ttings ..............101-102, 104

- sun visor

- driver's storage compartments

- glove box

- mat

6-speed manual gearbox ............ 157

Gear shift indicator ..................... 157

Electronic gear control gearbox .............................158-161

Automatic gearbox...............162-164

Stop & Start .........................165-167

Hill start assist ............................ 146

Eco-driving...............................25-26

12 V accessory socket................ 103

Centre console ........................... 103

Peugeot Connect USB ... 103, 254, 310, 336

Electric parking brake ..................141-145, 147-148

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (CONTINUED)

Multifunction screens ...............42-50

- Screen A

- Screen C

- 16/9 colour screen

Retractable screen ....................... 51

Screen A

(setting the date/time) .......... 43, 45

Instrument panels, screens .....27-29

Warning lamps .........................29-37

Indicators .................................37-40

Gear shift indicator ..................... 157

Buttons ................................... 39, 41

- check / service indicator / trip distance recorder

- lighting dimmer

Head-up display...................149-150

Distance alert.......................151-152

Lighting controls ......................89-92

Direction indicators ..................... 129

Wiper controls..........................95-97

Trip computer ..........................52-55

Ignition switch ............................... 76

Hazard warning lamps ................ 129

Head-up display...................149-150

Distance alert.......................151-152

Door mirrors .................................. 72

Electric windows, deactivating .......81-82

Speed limiter........................153-154

Cruise control ......................155-156

Switch panel ................................. 16

Stop & Start .........................165-167

Panoramic sunroof ..................... 107

Headlamp height adjustment ........ 93

Steering wheel adjustment ........... 73

Horn ............................................ 129

357

358

MAINTENANCE - TECHNICAL DATA

Running out of fuel, Diesel ......... 174

12 V battery .........................208-210

Load reduction, economy mode ...... 211

Engine compartment fuses .........................201, 205-207

Petrol weights ............................. 218

Diesel weights .....................220-222

Diesel weights - LCV .................. 223

Checking levels ...................177-178

- oil

- brake fl uid

- power steering fl uid

- coolant

- screenwash/headlamp wash fl uid

Checking components .........179-180

- air fi lter

- passenger compartment fi lter

- oil fi lter

- brake pads / discs

Changing bulbs....................196-200

- front

- rear

Identi fi cation markings ................ 225

Opening the bonnet .................... 173

Under the bonnet, petrol ............. 175

Under the bonnet, Diesel ............ 176

Petrol engines............................. 217

Diesel engines ............................ 219

Dimensions ................................. 224

This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.

Your vehicle will be fi tted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the speci fi cation for the country in which it is sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical speci fi cations, equipment and accessories without having to update the current handbook.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation (Directive

2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook is prohibited without written authorisation from

Automobiles PEUGEOT.

For any work on your vehicle, use a quali fi ed workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.

Printed in the EU Anglais

07-12

www.peugeot.com

Anglais

AN. 13588.0030